Руководство по эксплуатации вольво s60 2007 года

Выложил тут. PDF. 8Mb

Цена вопроса: 0 ₽
Пробег: 115 000 км

Машины в продаже

Комментарии
3

Войдите или зарегистрируйтесь, чтобы писать комментарии, задавать вопросы и участвовать в обсуждении.

Требуется руководство для вашей Volvo S60 (2007)? Ниже вы можете просмотреть и загрузить бесплатно руководство в формате PDF. Кроме того, приведены часто задаваемые вопросы, рейтинг изделия и отзывы пользователей, что позволит оптимально использовать ваше изделие. Если это не то руководство, которое вы искали, – свяжитесь с нами.

Ваше устройство неисправно, и в руководстве отсутствует решение? Перейдите в Repair Café для получения бесплатных ремонтных услуг.

Руководство

Рейтинг

Сообщите нам, что вы думаете о Volvo S60 (2007), оставив оценку продукта. Хотите поделиться вашими впечатлениями от данного изделия или задать вопрос? Вы можете оставить комментарий в нижней части страницы.

Довольны ли вы данным изделием Volvo?
Да Нет

Будьте первым, кто оценит это изделие

0 голоса

Часто задаваемые вопросы

Наша служба поддержки выполняет поиск полезной информации по изделиям и отвечает на часто задаваемые вопросы. Если вы заметили неточность в наших часто задаваемых вопросах, сообщите нам об этом с помощью нашей контактной формы.

В моей машине есть цепь ГРМ. С каким интервалом ее нужно менять? Проверенный
При нормальной эксплуатации цепь ГРМ должна прослужить весь срок службы автомобиля и не нуждается в замене.

Это было полезно (2409)

Почему я не могу открыть одну или несколько дверей изнутри? Проверенный
Вероятно, в машине активирован детский замок. Обычно его можно разблокировать с помощью механизма в двери.

Это было полезно (761)

Как часто следует менять масло? Проверенный
Практически для каждого автомобиля есть свои точные рекомендации, однако в целом масло разумно менять каждые 10 000–15 000 км пробега или один раз в год. Загрязненное масло может со временем серьезно повредить двигатель.

Это было полезно (643)

Когда следует отключать подушку безопасности сбоку от пассажирского сиденья? Проверенный
При движении с ребенком в автокресле на пассажирском сиденье необходимо выключить подушку безопасности с этой стороны. Это также рекомендуется для детей до 12 лет, которые размещаются на пассажирском сиденье. Это необходимо для предотвращения травм в случае аварии.

Это было полезно (582)

Ключи от машины больше не будут открывать машину на расстоянии, почему? Проверенный
Автомобильные ключи, которые можно разблокировать на расстоянии, обычно работают от аккумулятора. Когда он закончится, ключ перестанет работать. Замените аккумулятор и попробуйте еще раз.

Это было полезно (575)

Приведет ли более низкое давление в шинах к большему сцеплению с дорожным покрытием при езде по снегу? Проверенный
Нет, несмотря на то что при снижении давления пятно контакта шин с дорогой увеличивается, автомобиль становится менее устойчивым. Садитесь за руль, только если в шинах правильное давление!

Это было полезно (330)

Я залил в машину не то топливо, что мне делать? Проверенный
Не садитесь за руль! Неважно, заливаете ли вы дизельное топливо в автомобиль с бензиновым двигателем или бензин в автомобиль с дизельным двигателем. В обоих случаях это может привести к повреждению машины и / или других частей автомобиля. Обратитесь в службу технической поддержки на дорогах.

Это было полезно (219)

Где я могу найти VIN-номер моей машины? Проверенный
Это может варьироваться в зависимости от марки и модели, но на многих автомобилях номер VIN можно найти на дверном косяке, под капотом или на металлическом полу переднего сиденья.

Это было полезно (184)

Как часто нужно менять щетки дворников? Проверенный
Желательно заменять щетки стеклоочистителя не реже одного раза в год. Признаками необходимости замены лезвий являются полосы, дымка, шум или отслоение резины.

Это было полезно (160)

Сколько миль в одном километре? Проверенный
1 километр равен 0,621 мили. 10 километров равны 6,21 мили. 1 миля равна 1,609 километра. 10 миль равны 16,09 километра.

Это было полезно (137)

Какой номер VIN? Проверенный
VIN означает идентификационный номер автомобиля и является уникальным номером, который есть у каждого автомобиля. Это делает автомобиль не идентифицируемым, например, после аварии или в случае отзыва. Это также позволяет идентифицировать автомобиль в случае отсутствия номерных знаков.

Это было полезно (135)

Могу ли я использовать дворники, когда на лобовом стекле обледенел? Проверенный
Нет, это не рекомендуется. Лед острый и может повредить резину на щетках стеклоочистителя.

Это было полезно (132)

После замены шин мой Volvo выдает ошибку. Это почему? Проверенный
Это может произойти после смены шин. Откалибруйте систему контроля давления в шинах. Если это не помогает, обратитесь к производителю.

Это было полезно (52)

Руководство Volvo S60 (2007)

Volvo S60 Owner's Manual

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Volvo Manuals
  4. Automobile
  5. S60 — ANNEXE 931
  6. Owner’s manual

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

VOLVO

S60 & S60 R

WEB EDITION

2005

loading

Related Manuals for Volvo S60

Summary of Contents for Volvo S60

  • Page 1
    VOLVO S60 & S60 R WEB EDITION 2005…
  • Page 2: Safety

    Dear Volvo owner We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental require- ments.

  • Page 3
    Owner’s Manual NOTE! Volvo cars are adapted for the varying requirements of different markets, as well as A good way of getting to know your new car for national or local legal requirements and is to read the owner’s manual, ideally before regulations.
  • Page 4: Volvo Cars And The Environment

    , a concept which means that you benefit example in heavy city traffic, tailbacks and ities of Volvo Cars. Volvo cars comply with in two ways — from a clean cabin and a highly tunnels — while the carbon filter traps nitrogen…

  • Page 5
    In terms of fuel significantly higher fuel as batteries and oils, in economy, Volvo cars are highly competitive in consumption, they an environmentally safe their respective segments. should be removed manner. If uncertain, ask immediately after use.
  • Page 6: Table Of Contents

    Safety Instruments and controls Climate control Interior Locks and alarm Starting and driving Wheels and tyres Car care Maintenance and service Audio (option) Telephone (option) Technical data…

  • Page 7
    Overview, left-hand drive car Left-hand drive…
  • Page 8
    Fog lamps page 41 control page 47 Active chassis-Four page 40/ Headlamps/ page 41 Speedometer page 32 C (S60 R) page 106 Position/Parking lights Direction indicators page 42 Rear fog lamp page 41 Tachometer page 32 Direction indicators/…
  • Page 9
    Overview, right-hand drive car Right-hand drive…
  • Page 10
    Outside temperature/ page 32/ Active chassis-Four C page 38/ Clock/Gear position page 32/ (S60 R) page 106 Rear fog lamp page 41 page 32 Headlamps/ page 41 Tachometer page 32 Position/Parking lights Direction indicators page 42 Fog lamps page 41…
  • Page 12
    Safety Seatbelts Airbags (SRS) Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS) Side airbags (SIPS) Inflatable Curtain (IC) WHIPS When are the safety systems activated? Inspecting the airbags and inflatable curtains Child safety…
  • Page 13
    • Never modify or repair the seatbelts quences if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure • the hip strap must be positioned low yourself. Contact an authorised Volvo that all passengers use their seatbelts. down (not over the abdomen). workshop.
  • Page 14: Seatbelt Tensioner

    Safety Seatbelts and pregnancy Label on seatbelts with seatbelt tensioner It is extremely important that the seatbelt is Seatbelt tensioner used correctly during pregnancy. It should be All the seatbelts are equipped with belt in contact with the body. The upper part of the tensioners.

  • Page 15
    Safety Airbags (SRS) WARNING! • Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated • Never allow a child to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. •…
  • Page 16: Instrument Panel

    The symbol can indicate a fault in the seatbelt, SRS, SIPS or IC system. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop as soon as possible. Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand…

  • Page 17: Srs System

    Work on the SRS system can cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Airbags (SRS) NOTE! The airbags have a function whereby their capacities are adapted to the collision force to which the vehicle is subjected.

  • Page 18
    The airbag (SRS) for the front passenger seat passenger door is open. Check that the can be deactivated. This is necessary if a switch is in the required position. Volvo child seat is to be placed there. recommends that that the ignition key is used Indicator to change position.
  • Page 19
    (SRS) is deactivated and the airbag warning symbol is displayed in the combined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop as soon as possible.
  • Page 20: Side Airbags (Sips)

    Side airbags – SIPS bag WARNING! A large proportion of the collision force is Use only Volvo genuine car seat covers, or transferred by the SIPS to the floor, roof, seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat beams, pillars, and other structural parts of covers may impede the operation of the the body.

  • Page 21: Inflatable Curtain (Ic)

    The This could compromise the intended inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver protection. Only use Volvo genuine parts and passengers from striking their heads on that are approved for placement in these the inside of the car during a collision.

  • Page 22
    Contact vehicle all have an influence. The WHIPS system does not diminish the an authorised Volvo workshop to have the protection provided by the car to children system checked even after a minor rear- WARNING! seated in a child seat or on a booster end collision.
  • Page 23
    Safety WHIPS WARNING! Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop. You may place: • a child seat or booster cushion on the front passenger seat, provided the passenger airbag is not activated •…
  • Page 24: When Are The Safety Systems Activated

    (SRS) Never drive with deployed airbags! This – Have the car towed to an authorised Volvo The airbags deploy: may make the car difficult to steer. Other workshop. Do not drive the car with the •…

  • Page 25: Inspecting The Airbags And Inflatable Curtains

    The decal on the door pillar(s) shows the Side airbag on the driver’s side dates (year, month) when you should contact an authorised Volvo workshop to inspect and, Side airbag on the passenger side if necessary, replace the airbags, belt Inflatable curtain on the driver’s side…

  • Page 26: Child Safety

    Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger. Volvo’s own child safety equipment is designed for your car. Use Volvo genuine equipment to best ensure that the mounting points and attachments are correctly Airbags (SRS) and child seats are not positioned and are sufficiently strong.

  • Page 27
    Safety Child safety Placement of children in the car Weight/age Front seat Outer rear seat Centre rear seat <10 kg Alternatives: Alternatives: • Rear-facing child seat, secured with seatbelt, support legs and (0–9 • Rear-facing child seat, secured with • Rear-facing child seat, secured with straps.
  • Page 28: Integrated Booster Cushion

    The outer rear seats have ISOFIX attachment Volvo’s integrated booster cushion is can endanger the life of the child. points for child seats. Contact a Volvo dealer specially designed to provide optimum safety for further information on child safety for children.

  • Page 29
    Replacing the booster cushion It is important that the integrated booster cushion is properly secured. Therefore, leave replacement and any repair of the cushion to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not modify or adapt the booster cushion yourself in any way.
  • Page 30: Fitting A Child Seat

    The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn. Fitting a child seat Volvo has child safety products that are designed for and tested by Volvo. When using other products that are available on the market, it is important to read the fitting instructions included with the product.

  • Page 31
    Safety…
  • Page 32: Instruments And Controls

    Instruments and controls Combined instrument panel Indicator and warning symbols Switches in the centre console Lighting panel Direction indicators Windscreen wipers/washer Hazard warning flashers, rear window and door mirror defrosters, heated front seats Trip computer Cruise control (option) Parking brake, electric socket/cigarette lighter Steering wheel adjustment Power windows Rearview mirror, door mirrors and side windows…

  • Page 33: Combined Instrument Panel

    Instruments and controls Combined instrument panel 1. Temperature gauge 5. Cruise control indicator 11. Outside temperature gauge Displays the temperature of the engine See page 47. Displays outside temperature. When the cooling system. If the temperature is abnor- temperature lies between +2 °C to –5 °C, a 6.

  • Page 34: Indicator And Warning Symbols

    It was an indicator error. amber glow depending on the • If the warning symbol remains lit, drive to severity of the fault. an authorised Volvo workshop to have the Red symbol: ABS system checked. – Stop the car! Read the message in the Fault in brake system display.

  • Page 35: Seatbelt Reminder

    Instruments and controls Indicator and warning symbols towed to an authorised Volvo workshop to Seatbelt reminder Engine preheater (diesel) have the brake system checked. This lamp lights until the driver This lamp indicates engine If the BRAKE and ABS warning buckles up.

  • Page 36
    The TC function has been temporarily • If the warning symbol remains lit, drive to suppressed because the brake temperature an authorised Volvo workshop to have the is too high. system checked. Automatic reactivation of the function takes…
  • Page 37: Information Display

    Instruments and controls Information display Messages in the display Press the READ button to return read messages to the memory. A message appears in the display whenever a warning or indicator symbol lights. Once you NOTE! If a warning message interrupts when have read and understood the message, you are in the trip computer menu or wish to press the READ button (A).

  • Page 38
    Instruments and controls Message Specification Low engine oil level. Stop the car safely, switch off the engine and check the oil level. See OIL LEVEL LOW – STOP ENGINE page 157. Low engine oil level. Stop the car safely, switch off the engine and check the oil level. See OIL LEVEL LOW –…
  • Page 39: Switches In The Centre Console

    Instruments and controls Switches in the centre console Deactivate the system if you must use a wheel The STC/DTSC system with different dimensions. NOTE! The order of the buttons may vary. This button is used to reduce The STC/ DSTC system is reactivated when Active chassis, FOUR-C (option) or reactivate the functions of the engine is restarted.

  • Page 40
    Instruments and controls is activated by pressing in the button. Once Do as follows if a door mirror has been Deactivation of the deadlocks the lighter has been heated, the button pops accidentally folded in or out: and detectors out again. Pull out the lighter to use it. For –…
  • Page 41
    Instruments and controls Switches in the centre console Active chassis, FOUR-C (S60 R) Press one of the buttons to select Comfort, Sport or Advanced mode. For further infor- mation, see page 106.
  • Page 42: Lighting Panel

    D – Fog lamps (option) and cannot be switched off. Before trips to certain countries, an authorised Volvo Ignition key in position II. Press the button. The fog lamps light in combination with the…

  • Page 43: Direction Indicators

    The will remain lit for 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Your lever returns when released. authorised Volvo workshop can select a suitable time setting. Normal turns The direction indicators light when you move the lever in the direction the wheel moves during the turn.

  • Page 44: Windscreen Washer

    Instruments and controls Windscreen wipers/washer The wipers sweep at high speed. The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the key is removed from the ignition switch or five minutes after the ignition is Rain sensor (option) switched off. The rain sensor automatically increases or decreases the speed of the windscreen Important! wipers based on how much water it detects…

  • Page 45
    Windscreen washer and headlamp washer (S60 R) Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers.
  • Page 46
    Instruments and controls Hazard warning flashers, rear window and door mirror defrosters, heated front seats Door mirror and rear window defrosters Use the defroster to remove ice and misting from the rear window and door mirrors. Pressing the switch starts defrosting the rear window and door mirrors simultaneously.
  • Page 47: Trip Computer

    Instruments and controls Trip computer Functions Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption since the last The trip computer displays the following infor- reset (RESET). The average fuel consumption mation: is stored when the ignition is switched off and • AVERAGE SPEED remains until reset with the RESET button (C) •…

  • Page 48: Cruise Control (Option)

    Instruments and controls Cruise control (option) Activating Return to the set speed The controls for cruise Press this button to resume the control are to the left of the previously set speed. CRUISE ON steering wheel. appears on the combined instrument panel.

  • Page 49: Parking Brake, Electric Socket/Cigarette Lighter

    Instruments and controls Parking brake, electric socket/cigarette lighter Parking brake (handbrake) Electric socket/cigarette lighter, rear seat The lever is located between the front seats. The parking brake operates on the rear The electric socket can be used for various wheels. The warning symbol in the combined 12 V accessories, such a mobile phone or a instrument panel lights when the brake is cooler box.

  • Page 50: Steering Wheel Adjustment

    Instruments and controls Steering wheel adjustment The steering wheel can be adjusted both vertically and front-rear. Press down the control on the left-hand side of the steering column. Then adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you best. Press the control back into place to lock the steering wheel.

  • Page 51: Power Windows

    Instruments and controls Power windows The power windows are operated using the NOTE! The function auto up for the controls in the door armrests. The ignition key passenger side is only available in certain must be turned to position I or II for the power markets.

  • Page 52: Passenger Seat

    Instruments and controls Blocking power windows in the Power window in the front Power windows in the rear rear doors passenger seat doors. The rear power windows can be blocked The control for the power window at the front The rear door windows can be operated with using the switch on the driver’s door control passenger seat operates that window only.

  • Page 53: Rearview Mirror, Door Mirrors And Side Windows

    The next time you unlock the light relationships. An authorised Volvo Adjust the position with the adjustment workshop can adjust the sensitivity. car with the same remote control and open control in the centre.

  • Page 54
    Instruments and controls passenger compartment and provide better Important! protection against unauthorised entry. Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove Water and dirt-repellent coating ice from the windows. The water and dirt- on the front windows and/or repellent coating could be damaged. door mirrors (option) Use the defroster to remove ice from the mirrors!
  • Page 55: Power Sunroof (Option)

    Instruments and controls Power sunroof (option) WARNING! If there are children in the car: Remember to switch off the supply to the sunroof (remove the ignition key) if the driver leaves the car. Open positions Closing, automatic Closing, manual Sunroof controls are located in the Opening, manual headlining.

  • Page 56
    Instruments and controls Move the control over the resistance point WARNING! position (3) to the rearmost end position (4) Pinch protection functions only in the or over the resistance point position (2) to the opening position – not in ventilation front end position (1) and release.
  • Page 57
    Instruments and controls…
  • Page 58: Climate Control

    Climate control General information on climate control Manual climate control with air conditioning (AC) Electronic Climate Control (ECC) Air distribution Fuel-driven parking heater (option)

  • Page 59: Interior

    Fault tracing the physical experience with reference to air An authorised Volvo workshop has the instru- speed, humidity, exposure to sun, etc. which ments and tools required for any fault tracing affect the interior and exterior of the car.

  • Page 60: Air Distribution

    Climate control Air distribution Air vents in the dashboard Incoming air is distributed through several Open different vents located throughout the car. Closed Lateral airflow Vertical airflow Aim the outer vents towards the side windows to remove misting.

  • Page 61: General Information On Climate Control

    Climate control General information on climate control Air vents in the door pillars Open Closed Lateral airflow Vertical airflow – Aim the vents toward the rear side windows to remove misting. – Aim the vents inwards in the car for a comfortable climate in the rear seat.

  • Page 62
    – Press three times: Heating switched off – (0R15° C) to dehumidify incoming air. no LEDs in the switch light up. hand side Your Volvo workshop can adjust the temper- Turn to set how warm or cold ature. the incoming air shall be. For cooler air, the air condi- tioning must be connected.
  • Page 63: Door Mirror Defrosters

    Climate control Manual climate control with air conditioning (AC) in winter. The timer function minimises the risk of ice, misting and bad air. Fan speed can be increased Activate the function as follows: or decreased by turning the knob. If the knob is set to 0, –…

  • Page 64
    Climate control Electronic Climate Control (ECC) AC – ON/OFF AUTO Temperature Recirculation/Multifilter with sensor The AUTO function automat- The two knobs can be used Recirculation ically regulates climate to set the temperature for the AUTO control so that the desire passenger and driver’s sides temperature is attained.
  • Page 65
    Air to head and body conditioning system are switched off. no LEDs in the switch light up. Air to legs and feet Rear window and door mirror Your Volvo workshop can adjust the temper- Press AUTO to return to ature. defrosters automatic air distribution.
  • Page 66
    64. • Follow the Volvo service program for the When the air quality sensor is active, the recommended replacement interval of the green AUT LED lights in Multifilter.
  • Page 67
    Climate control Air distribution Air distribution Air distribution Air distribution Air to floor In sunny weather and air vents. with cool outside Air through When you want temperatures. front and rear good cooling in a air vents. warm climate. Air to When you want windows.
  • Page 68: Fuel-Driven Parking Heater (Option)

    60 minutes. If the parking heater does not start despite repeated attempts, a message is shown on the display. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop. WARNING! • Switch off the fuel-driven heater before refuelling.

  • Page 69
    Climate control Fuel-driven heater (option) Setting TIMER 1 and 2 – Press the RESET button (C). The text Important! OFF is displayed with a steady glow and For reasons of safety, you can only Repeated use of the parking heater in the heater is switched off.
  • Page 70
    Interior Front seats Interior lighting Storage spaces in the passenger compartment Rear seat Cargo area…
  • Page 71: Front Seats

    Interior Front seats WARNING! • Adjust the position of the driver’s seat before setting off, never while driving. • Check that the seat is locked in position. Seating position Lowering the front seat backrest The driver’s and passenger seats can be The passenger seat backrest can be folded adjusted to the optimum sitting and driving forward to make room for long loads.

  • Page 72: Seat Adjustment

    Interior adjusted within 4.5 minutes of unlocking the door with the key or remote control. If the door is closed but the ignition key has not yet been inserted in the ignition switch or is in position 0 in the ignition switch, settings can be made within 40 seconds of closing the door.

  • Page 73
    Interior Front seats Setting preset positions Press and hold one of the memory buttons (5),(6) or (7) until the seat stops. If you release the button, the seat stops immediately for safety reasons. Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the buttons to stop the seat.
  • Page 74: Interior Lighting

    10 minutes can be changed. Contact an General lighting is activated and deactivated Switch on the front seat or rear seat reading authorised Volvo workshop. by pressing the centre button. General lamps with the corresponding button. lighting comes on automatically…

  • Page 75
    Interior Interior lighting Vanity mirror The light comes on automatically when the cover is lifted. Option on certain markets.
  • Page 76
    Interior Storage spaces in the passenger compartment…
  • Page 77: Storage Spaces In The Passenger Compartment

    Interior Storage spaces in the passenger compartment Storage spaces Storage pocket Compartment in door panel. Storage pocket Ticket clip. Cup holder (option) Glovebox. Storage compartment in the centre console Cup holder in the armrest, rear seat. WARNING! Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objects lie or protrude in such a way that Storage compartment in centre 12 V socket…

  • Page 78
    NOTE! Never use glass bottles. Remember also that hot drinks may cause burns. Angle the front edge of the cup holder Volvo offers custom made floor mats for your up and lift out. car. They must be properly placed and…
  • Page 79
    Interior Storage spaces in the passenger compartment Coat hanger Bottle holder for rear seat Cup holder in the armrest, rear passengers (option) seat The coat hanger is only intended for light garments. Do as follows to use the bottle holder: –…
  • Page 80: Rear Seat

    Interior Rear seat Adjusting the vertical position of the head restraint Tipping the rear seat backrest Head restraints in the rear seat Both rear seat backrests can be tipped The centre seat head restraint can be forward, together or individually. This makes it WARNING! adjusted vertically to suit the height of the easier to transport long objects.

  • Page 81
    Interior Rear seat Hatch for long objects A hatch in the right-hand rear backrest allows you to transport long objects such as skis and planks. Open the hatch as follows: – Fold the right-hand backrest forward. See page 70. – Release the hatch by pushing the catch upward while folding the hatch forward.
  • Page 82: Cargo Area

    Interior Cargo area The payload of the car is reduced by the number of passengers and their weight. WARNING! The driving characteristics of the car change based on its kerb weight and how heavily it is loaded. Bag holder (option) Open the hatch in the cargo compartment.

  • Page 83
    Interior…
  • Page 84: Locks And Alarm

    Locks and alarm Keys and remote controls Locking and unlocking Child safety locks Alarm (option)

  • Page 85: Keys And Remote Controls

    Store the label in a safe place. Take the label to your Volvo dealer if you wish to order new keys. A maximum of six remote controls/keys can be programmed and used.

  • Page 86: Remote Control Functions

    Open the boot lid. (option) will switch on. These lamps will remain lit for 30, 60 or 90 seconds. An Alarm function authorised Volvo workshop can select a Approach lighting suitable time setting. Locks To extinguish the approach lighting: Folding/opening the key –…

  • Page 87: Locking And Unlocking

    Locks and alarm Locking and unlocking Turn the old battery in to your Volvo workshop so that it can be disposed of in an environ- mentally friendly manner. Changing the remote control battery Replace the battery after repeated failure by…

  • Page 88: Automatic Relocking

    Locks and alarm the car from being left unlocked uninten- tionally. For cars with alarms, see page 91 Automatic locking (option) The doors lock automatically when vehicle speed exceeds 7 km/h and remain locked until a door is opened from the inside or unlocked using a central locking button.

  • Page 89
    Locks and alarm Locking and unlocking Unlocking/locking the boot lid with the remote control Do as follows to unlock the boot lid only: – Press the remote control button for the boot lid two times. The boot lid is unlocked and opens slightly. –…
  • Page 90
    Locks and alarm – Turn the master key to position II and message is shown on the display as long as press the button again. the key remains in the ignition switch. The sensors will be reactivated the next time the Locking the glovebox ignition is switched on.
  • Page 91: Child Safety Locks

    Locks and alarm Child safety locks Control for child safety lock – left rear door Child safety lock controls – right rear door. Mechanical child safety lock – WARNING! rear doors Remember that in the event of an The controls for the child safety locks are in accident, rear seat passengers cannot the rear edges of the rear doors and are only open rear doors from the inside if the child…

  • Page 92
    Locks and alarm Alarm (option) The alarm system alarm is deactivated. In certain markets, the key can be used to deactivate the alarm. When the alarm is armed, it continually monitors all alarm inputs. The alarm is Automatic alarm activation triggered if: If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened •…
  • Page 93
    If the alarm system does not function during a ferry crossing, the movement and tilt correctly, have an authorised Volvo workshop detectors can be temporarily deactivated: examine the car. – Insert the key in the ignition switch, turn it…
  • Page 94
    Locks and alarm Testing the alarm system – Arm the alarm (remain in the car and lock the doors with the button on the remote Testing the passenger compartment control). motion sensor: – Wait 30 seconds. – Open all the windows. –…
  • Page 95
    Locks and alarm…
  • Page 96: Starting And Driving

    Starting and driving General Refuelling Starting the car Manual gearbox Automatic gearbox Brake system Stability system Parking assistance (option) Towing and recovery Start assistance Driving with a trailer Towing equipment Detachable towbar Load on the roof Adjusting headlamp pattern BLIS (Blind Spot Information System)

  • Page 97: Economical Driving

    Starting and driving General Economical driving through the cargo compartment. If you must Also take note of different accessories that drive a short distance with the boot lid open, load the electrical system. Do not use Economical driving results from driving gently do as follows: functions that consume a lot of current when with anticipation and adapting your driving…

  • Page 98
    Starting and driving To avoid the engine overheating: Do not exceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm if driving with a trailer or caravan in hilly terrain. The oil temperature can become too high.
  • Page 99
    Refuelling with petrol NOTE! Do not add cleaning additives unless specifically recommended by a Volvo workshop. Opening the fuel filler flap Important! The fuel filler flap can be opened when the car is unlocked.
  • Page 100: Starting The Car

    0 – Locked position engine types – for a short duration. Gear selector in P or N position. The steering wheel locks For this reason, Volvo wishes to provide the Manual gearbox when the ignition key is correct emission control system operating Gear lever in neutral and the clutch pedal removed.

  • Page 101: Manual Gearbox

    Starting and driving Manual gearbox Gear positions, five-speed Reverse gear inhibitor Gear positions, six-speed Depress the clutch pedal fully with each gear Engage reverse gear when the car is Depress the clutch pedal fully with each gear change. Remove your foot from the clutch completely stationary.

  • Page 102: Automatic Gearbox

    Starting and driving Automatic gearbox Cold start Safety systems When starting in low temperatures, the gear Cars with an automatic gearbox have special changes can sometimes feel hard. This is due safety systems: to the gearbox oil’s viscosity at low tempera- Keylock tures.

  • Page 103
    Geartronic To move from the automatic driving position D Select this position when you wish to start the The S60 R with Geartronic has an S button to a manual position, move the gear selector engine or park the car.
  • Page 104: Speed Related Power Steering

    Starting and driving parking brake when the car is stationary with W – Winter. To prevent overrevving, the gearbox control the gear selector is in position N. program has a protective downshift inhibitor. The W button by the gear D – Drive selector engages and disen- The kick-down function cannot be used in…

  • Page 105: Brake System

    Volvo is a delay before braking effect is noticed. feel the pedal drop. This is normal and due to workshop to have the brake system the brake servo becoming active.

  • Page 106
    Do not release the pedal when you the brake fluid reservoir is normal, drive hear and feel the ABS pulses. Practice carefully to the nearest authorised Volvo braking with the ABS system at a suitable workshop to have the brake system spot such as a track to practice skidding.
  • Page 107: Stability System

    Always take care when cornering and the accelerator more than usual. A pulsing driving in slippery conditions. sound is heard when Traction Control is Option in certain markets. Standard Option on certain markets on S60 R.

  • Page 108
    Sport In Sport mode, steering responses are quicker than in Comfort mode. Damping is harder and the body follows the road surface 10. Only available on S60 R.
  • Page 109: Parking Assistance (Option)

    Rear parking assistance is deactivated Rear parking assistance is activated when the audio system is high, this is automatically automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo reverse gear is engaged. The signal comes lowered. genuine trailer cable is used.

  • Page 110
    Starting and driving Fault indicator The information symbol comes on and stays lit PARK ASSIST SERVICE REQUIRED is shown in the infor- mation display in the centre of the combined instrument panel together with the symbol. Parking assistance sensors Cleaning the sensors The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly.
  • Page 111: Towing And Recovery

    Starting and driving Towing and recovery Do not bump start the engine. If you bump start a car with manual gearbox, the catalytic converter may be damaged. Cars with automatic gearbox cannot be bump started. Use a booster battery if the battery is flat.

  • Page 112
    Starting and driving Recovery The towing eye may only be used for towing on roads, not for recovery after driving into a ditch or the like. Professional help should be called for recovery.
  • Page 113: Start Assistance

    Starting and driving Start assistance – Connect the red cable between the WARNING! booster battery positive terminal (1+) and The battery can generate oxyhydrogen the red connection in the engine gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, compartment (2+). which can be generated if you connect the Attach the clamp to the contact point jump leads incorrectly, is sufficient to located beneath a small black cover with…

  • Page 114: Driving With A Trailer

    • The towing bracket on the car must be of • If the car overheats, the air conditioning WARNING! an approved type. Your Volvo dealer can system can be temporarily switched off. Follow the stated recommendations for advise you as to which towing bracket to •…

  • Page 115
    When the car is stationary, the rear trailer. Check with your nearest Volvo dealer suspension sinks. This is completely normal. as to what applies to your car if you have a When starting with a load, the level is pumped retrofitted towbar.
  • Page 116: Towing Equipment

    An adapter is required if the car’s towbar has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin WARNING! electrics. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable the ground. towbar: Follow the assembly instructions for the towball section carefully.

  • Page 117
    Starting and driving Towing equipment Specifications Distance B Fixed towbar:73 mm Distance A Detachable towbar:84 mm Fixed towbar:1057 mm Detachable towbar:1068 mm Maximum towball load:75 kg…
  • Page 118: Detachable Towbar

    Starting and driving Detachable towbar Fitting the towball 2. Ensure that the mechanism is in 3. Check that the indicator window (3) the unlocked position by turning the key shows red. If the window does not show 1. Remove the guard plug. clockwise.

  • Page 119: Removing The Towball

    Starting and driving Detachable towbar Removing the towball NOTE! Check that the towball section is NOTE! The trailer’s safety cable must be 1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the secure by pulling it up, down and back. If attached to the attachment on the towbar.

  • Page 120: Load On The Roof

    • Drive gently. Avoid quick accelerations, recommend that you only use load carriers heavy braking and taking curves hard. that Volvo has specially designed for your car. • Remove the load carrier when it is not in • Check periodically that the load carriers use.

  • Page 121
    Starting and driving Load on the roof – Check that the hook is properly secured in the roof bracket. – Tighten the knobs alternately until the carrier feels secure. – Replace the cover. – Check that the roof rack is properly secured.
  • Page 122: Adjusting Headlamp Pattern

    Starting and driving Adjusting headlamp pattern distance from the dot (5) to the corner of the mask, marked with an arrow. After copying the templates located on the next page, check the measurements so that the reference measurements cover enough of the beam pattern.

  • Page 123
    Starting and driving Adjusting headlamp pattern Location of halogen headlamp masks, 1 and 2 = LHD variant, 3 and 4 = RHD variant Halogen headlamps, LHD Halogen headlamps, RHD variant variant Copy templates 1 and 2. Check the measure- Copy templates 3 and 4. Check the measure- ments to ensure they are correct.
  • Page 124
    Starting and driving Masking templates for halogen headlamps, LHD variant Masking templates for halogen headlamps, RHD variant…
  • Page 125
    Starting and driving Adjusting headlamp pattern Location of Bi-Xenon headlamp masks, 1 and 2 = LHD variant, 3 and 4 = RHD variant Headlamp masking the reference measurements cover enough Bi-Xenon headlamps, RHD of the beam pattern. variant Copy the templates and transfer the pattern to a self-adhesive, waterproof material such Bi-Xenon headlamps, LHD Copy templates 3 and 4.
  • Page 126
    Starting and driving Masking templates for Bi-Xenon headlamps, LHD variant Masking templates for Bi-Xenon headlamps, RHD variant…
  • Page 127
    Starting and driving BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) the driver’s attention to a vehicle in the blind spot. WARNING! • BLIS is an information system, NOT a warning or safety system. • The system is a complement to, and not a replacement for, the existing rearview mirrors.
  • Page 128
    Starting and driving WARNING! • BLIS does not work in sharp bends. • The system does not work if the camera lenses are covered. In this case the BLIS indicator lamps flash and a text message is shown in the display (see table on page 128).
  • Page 129
    Starting and driving BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) System status Text in the display BLIS not functioning BLIND-SPOT SYST SERVICE REQUIRED Right-hand camera BLIND-SPOT SYST R CAMERA blocked BLOCKED Left-hand camera blocked BLIND-SPOT SYST L CAMERA BLOCKED Both cameras blocked BLIND-SPOT SYST CAMERAS BLOCKED BLIS system off…
  • Page 130: Wheels And Tyres

    Wheels and tyres General Tyre pressure Changing wheels Warning triangle and spare wheel Removing wheels Emergency puncture repair…

  • Page 131: New Tyres

    Speed rating (in this case 270 km/h). as fresh tyres as possible when you replace NOTE! Ask a Volvo dealer which rim and tyre them. This is especially important with regard Speed ratings types are most suitable.

  • Page 132
    Never use quick-fit snow chains as the space between the brake disks and the wheels is too small. Important! Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiv- alent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. Consult an authorised Volvo workshop.
  • Page 133: Tyre Pressure

    Wheels and tyres Tyre pressure Checking the tyre pressure Check the tyre pressure regularly. The correct tyre pressure is shown in the tyre pressure table. The stated tyre pressures refer to cold tyres. (Cold tyres mean the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature.) Driving with the wrong tyre pressure adversely affects the car’s driving characteristics and…

  • Page 134: Changing Wheels

    (to decrease the risk of skidding.) Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging up, and not standing up. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if you are uncertain about tread depth. The arrow shows the tyre’s direction of rotation.

  • Page 135: Warning Triangle And Spare Wheel

    Wheels and tyres Warning triangle and spare wheel location that is appropriate for the traffic situation. After use: Pack everything in reverse order. Make sure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the boot lid. Warning triangle (certain Spare wheel, tools and jack countries) Spare wheel.

  • Page 136: Temporary Spare

    Wheels and tyres If the car is equipped with a grocery bag NOTE! Only use the car’s own genuine holder: spare wheel! Tyres with other dimensions – Turn the two clips located at the rear may cause damage to your car. Only one corner of the mat 90 degrees.

  • Page 137: Removing Wheels

    Wheels and tyres Removing wheels – Cars with steel wheel rims have – There are two jacking points on each side Removing wheels removable wheel covers. Prise off the of the car. Remember to set out the warning triangle if wheel cover with a thick screwdriver or Hold the jack against the pin in the jacking you must change a wheel in a trafficked area.

  • Page 138
    Wheels and tyres Jack for all-wheel drive cars Fitting the wheel WARNING! – Clean the contract surfaces on the wheel and hub. Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack. – Fit the wheel. Screw the wheel nuts. Passengers must leave the car when it is –…
  • Page 139: Emergency Puncture Repair

    Wheels and tyres Emergency puncture repair emergency puncture repair kit if they have General larger slits, cracks, irregularities or similar Cars which do not have a spare wheel are damage. instead equipped with an emergency The emergency puncture repair kit with puncture repair kit.

  • Page 140: Inflating Tyres

    Wheels and tyres Inflating tyres – Pump up the tyre to the pressure WARNING! specified on the tyre pressure label. Set up the warning triangle if a tyre must be Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in – Turn off the compressor, the switch (2) inflated in an area close to traffic.

  • Page 141
    Wheels and tyres Emergency puncture repair Sealing punctured tyres – Connect the lead (5) to one of the car’s – Start the compressor by flicking the 12 V sockets. switch (2) to position I. The pressure may Set up the warning triangle if emergency tyre increase temporarily up to a maximum of –…
  • Page 142
    Wheels and tyres pumping, the compressor should be – Immediately drive about 3 km, at a – Turn off the compressor, the switch (2) turned off so it does not overheat. maximum speed of 80 km/h, to allow the should be in position 0. Detach the air sealing fluid to seal the tyre well.
  • Page 143
    Wheels and tyres Emergency puncture repair Changing the sealing fluid Check that the seal (7) on the new canister is WARNING! not damaged. Screw the canister into place. canister Ensure the compressor is not connected – Refit the casing (3). Check that the casing The canister of sealing fluid should be to the 12 V socket when the canister is is correctly mounted, screw it on with the…
  • Page 144
    Wheels and tyres Changing the canister and hose after – Undo the two screws (2) on the orange- coloured casing (3). – Remove the speed label (4) and date label (1), and open the safety catch (5). Loosen the case (3) and take it off. –…
  • Page 145
    Wheels and tyres…
  • Page 146: Car Care

    Car care Cleaning Touching up paintwork Rustproofing…

  • Page 147
    • If the dirt is ingrained, you can wash the Risk of fire! Entrust engine washing to an car with cold degreasing agent, but be authorised Volvo workshop. sure that there is a waste water separator where you are washing the car. When…
  • Page 148: Cleaning The Upholstery

    Car care Cleaning the upholstery you Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is Take care when cleaning so as not to damage dry before allowing it to retract. the glass surface. Treating spots on fabric To avoid damaging glass surfaces when…

  • Page 149: Touching Up Paintwork

    Car care Touching up paintwork Paintwork Paint is an important part of the car’s rustproofing and should therefore be checked regularly. Repair paintwork damage immediately so that it does not start to rust. The most common types of paintwork damage that you can repair yourself are: •…

  • Page 150
    Car care Do as follows if the stone chip went down to the bare metal: – Fasten a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface. Then remove the tape, removing any paint residue (illustration 1). – Stir the primer thoroughly and apply using a fine brush or matchstick (illustration 2).
  • Page 151
    If you want to repair the rustproofing yourself, fiers), the protective wax should be renewed make sure the area is clean and dry. Hose after washing. Your Volvo dealer handles down, wash and dry the car thoroughly. Use a such waxes.
  • Page 152: Maintenance And Service

    Maintenance and service Volvo service Self-maintenance Bonnet and engine compartment Diesel Oils and fluids Wiper blades Battery Replacing bulbs Fuses…

  • Page 153: Volvo Service

    To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as mation. system. Always contact an authorised Volvo possible, follow the Volvo service programme…

  • Page 154
    If the car is lifted with a workshop jack, it corrosive and toxic. Handle the battery in an should sit with the front edge on the engine environmentally-suitable way. Let your Volvo support arm. Do not damage the splashguard dealer assist you.
  • Page 155
    Maintenance and service Self-maintenance Check regularly Check the following at regular intervals, for example, when refuelling: • Coolant – The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank. • Engine oil – The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.
  • Page 156: Bonnet And Engine Compartment

    Maintenance and service Bonnet and engine compartment Left and right-hand drive cars. Opening the bonnet Engine compartment To open the bonnet: Expansion tank, cooling system Power steering fluid reservoir. – Pull the handle on the far left under the Washer fluid reservoir dashboard.

  • Page 157: Fuel Filter

    Maintenance and service Diesel Fuel system Draining condensation from the fuel filter Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants. Only use diesel from a well-known oil The fuel filter separates condensation from company. Never fill up with diesel if the quality the fuel.

  • Page 158: Oils And Fluids

    The oil level must be within the area marked MAX marks. on the dipstick Volvo recommends checking the oil level – If the level is close to the MIN mark, start every 2500 km. The most accurate measure- by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up…

  • Page 159
    Maintenance and service Oils and fluids Important! Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo. New cars are filled with coolant that can withstand temperatures down to approxi- mately -35 °C. Important! The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system.
  • Page 160: Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

    Maintenance and service WARNING! If the level of brake fluid in the reservoir is below the MIN mark, the car should not be driven until the brake fluid has been topped up. The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

  • Page 161: Wiper Blades

    – Fit the new blade in reverse order and check that it is properly secured. NOTE! Bear in mind that the wiper blade on the driver’s side is longer than the one on the passenger side. Applies to S60 R.

  • Page 162
    Maintenance and service Battery NOTE! Never fill above the maximum The battery contains mark (A). corrosive acid. Important! Always use distilled or deionised water Avoid sparks and naked (battery water). flames. • Tighten the caps properly. NOTE! The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.
  • Page 163: Changing The Battery

    Maintenance and service Battery – Detach the lower console holding the WARNING! battery. Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas, – Bend aside the plastic cover and which is highly explosive. A spark, which disconnect the positive cable. can be generated if you connect the jump –…

  • Page 164: Replacing Bulbs

    On certain variants, a white plastic sleeve may work on the lights should be carried out at impede bulb replacement. This can be an authorised Volvo workshop. broken off and discarded. Bi-Xenon headlamps must be handled with extreme care due to the high-voltage unit.

  • Page 165: Main Beam

    Maintenance and service Replacing bulbs Dipped beam bulb Fitting the dipped beam bulb Main beam bulb Dipped beam To fit: Main beam – Fit the new bulb. In can only be positioned To remove the bulb: To remove the bulb: one way.

  • Page 166
    Maintenance and service To fit: – Fit the new bulb. In can only be positioned one way. – Plug in the connector. – Put the lamp back in place and turn it so that the connector faces down. – Refit the cover. Position and parking lamp bulb Direction indicator bulb, left-hand side Position/parking lamps…
  • Page 167: Side Marker Lamps

    Maintenance and service Replacing bulbs – Refit the ventilation hose onto the filler pipe (4). – Screw in the screw (2) to the filler pipe and refit the radiator hose to the radiator (1). Direction indicator bulb, right-hand side Side marker lamp Direction indicator, right-hand Side marker lamps side…

  • Page 168: Side Direction Indicators

    Maintenance and service – Refit the lamp with lens in the front wing. Press it straight inward. Fog lamp Side direction indicator Front fog lamps (option) Side direction indicators To remove the bulb: To remove the bulb: – Switch off all lights and turn the ignition –…

  • Page 169
    – Unlock and fold down the side panel to faulty bulb has been replaced then an access the bulbs. Bulb specifications can be found on authorised Volvo workshop needs to be page 228. The bulbs are located in two separate bulb consulted to rectify the fault.
  • Page 170: Courtesy Lighting

    Maintenance and service Number plate lighting Courtesy lighting Cargo area Number plate lighting Courtesy lighting Cargo area – Switch off all lights and turn the ignition There is courtesy lighting under the – Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so key to position 0.

  • Page 171
    Maintenance and service Replacing bulbs Vanity mirror, different versions Vanity mirror lighting – Insert a screwdriver and turn so that the lamp lens releases. – Remove the bulb. – Fit a new bulb. – First press the bottom of the lamp glass back into place above the four hooks.
  • Page 172
    If the same fuse blows repeatedly, there is a fault in the component. Fuse box in the passenger compartment at dashboard end on Contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have it checked. driver’s side. Fuse box in cargo compartment.
  • Page 173
    Maintenance and service Fuses Accelerator pedal sensor (APM), AC compressor, fan electronics box …………..10 A Gas tank valve (Bi-fuel LPG) ……….. 10 A 10. -…………………… — 11. Ignition coils (petrol), relay coils……….20 A 12. -…………………… — 13. Windscreen wipers …………..25 A 14.
  • Page 174
    Maintenance and service OBDII, light switch (LSM), Steering Angle Sensor (SAS), Steering Wheel Module (SWM) ……….5 A 10. Audio ………………..20 A 11. Amplifier ………………30 A 12. RTI display………………10 A 13. Telephone ………………5 A 14-38 — Fuses in the passenger compartment at dashboard end on driver’s side Power driver’s seat …………..
  • Page 175
    32. Reserve ………………..- Reserve ………………..- 33. Vacuum pump…………….20 A Siren………………..5 A 34. Washer pump, headlamp wipers (S60 R) ……15 A Brake lamp switch feed …………..5 A 35. -…………………… — 10. Combined instrument panel (DIM), climate control (CCM), 36.
  • Page 176
    Maintenance and service Reserve ………………..- REM electronics …………….10 A CD changer, TV, RTI …………..7,5 A Towing bracket wiring (30-feed) ……….15 A Cargo compartment socket…………15 A Rear right door: power window, power window lock..20 A 10.
  • Page 177
    Maintenance and service Fuses 30. Trailer lighting, right: brake lamp, rear fog lamp, direction indicator ……………. 25 A 31. Main fuse: Fuse 37, 38…………… 40 A 32. — …………………… — 33. — …………………… — 34. — …………………… — 35. — …………………… — 36.
  • Page 178: Audio (Option)

    Audio (option) Overview HU-450 Overview HU-650 Overview HU-850 Audio functions HU-450/650/850 Audio functions HU-450 Audio functions HU-650/850 Radio functions HU-450/650/850 Radio functions HU-450 Radio functions HU-650/850 Radio functions HU-450/650/850 Cassette player HU-450 CD player HU-650 Internal CD changer HU-850 External CD changer HU-450/650/850 Dolby Surround Pro Logic II HU-850 Technical data…

  • Page 179
    Audio (option) Overview HU-450 POWER (On/Off) – Press Volume – Navigation buttons – 16. Cassette eject Turn CD/radio – seek/change station or track Cassette – Fast forward/rewind /select PRESET/ CD PUSH MENU– next/previous track Stored radio stations CD changer (option) Display SOURCE PUSH MENU–…
  • Page 180
    Audio (option) Overview HU-650 POWER (On/Off) – Press 10. Navigation buttons – VOLUME – Turn seek/change station or track Station storing buttons/selection of disc 11. CD eject in CD changer (1-6) 12. CD slot BASS – Press out and turn 13.
  • Page 181
    Audio (option) Overview HU-850 POWER (On/Off) – Press 10. Navigation buttons – VOLUME – Turn seek/change station or track Station storing buttons/selection of disc 11. CD eject in CD changer (1-6) 12. Dolby Surround Pro Logic II BASS – Press out and turn 13.
  • Page 182: Volume Control

    Audio (option) Audio functions HU-450/650/850 On/Off switch Press the knob to turn on or switch off the radio. Volume control Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume. Volume control is electronic and lacks an end stop. If you have a steering wheel keypad, increase or decrease volume with (+) or (–) buttons.

  • Page 183: Audio Functions Hu

    Audio (option) Audio functions HU-450 Bass Balance – right/left Adjust the bass by pressing Adjust balance by pressing out the knob and turning it to and pulling out the knob and the left or right. turning it left or right. The balance is «normalised»…

  • Page 184
    Audio (option) Audio functions HU-650/850 Balance – right/left Press the AM or FM button repeatedly to toggle Adjust balance by pressing the knob and between FM1, FM2, FM3 turning it left or right. The balance is and AM1, AM2. «normalised» in the centre position. Press the knob back into its original position after The selected sound source adjustment.
  • Page 185: Manual Tuning

    Audio (option) Radio functions HU-450/650/850 Scanning NOTE! If the car is equipped with an integrated telephone, the steering wheel Press the SCAN button to keypad cannot be used for radio functions start the search. When the while the telephone is in use. Telephone infor- radio finds a station, it stops mation is continuously displayed while the there for about 10 seconds…

  • Page 186: Radio Functions Hu

    Audio (option) Radio functions HU-450 Programming stations the set frequency band are saved in the autostore memory. If there are no stations – Set the desired frequency. with sufficient signal strength, – Briefly press the PRESET/CD knob. NO STATION is displayed. Select a number by turning forward or –…

  • Page 187: Storing Stations

    Audio (option) Radio functions HU-650/850 Autostoring stations Returning to autostore mode: AUTO seeks and stores up – Briefly press AUTO. to ten strong AM or FM stations in a separate memory. If more than ten stations are found, the ten strongest are selected.

  • Page 188
    Audio (option) Radio functions HU-450/650/850 Radio Data System – RDS Traffic information – TP station – Activate the station from which traffic information is to be received. RDS is a system that links together specific Traffic information from RDS stations inter- –…
  • Page 189
    Audio (option) Radio functions HU-450/650/850 hazardous situations such as a collapsed Activating News: – Turn SOURCE, select bridge or nuclear mishap. – Select radio mode using the FM button ADVANCED MENU and press SOURCE. and press SOURCE. – Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS TP search –…
  • Page 190
    Audio (option) – Select radio mode using the FM button The PTY symbol disappears from the display Programme type Displayed and press SOURCE. and the radio resumes normal mode. Drama Theatre – Turn SOURCE, select PTY and press PTY language Culture and Art Culture SOURCE.
  • Page 191: Resetting Rds Functions

    Audio (option) Radio functions HU-450/650/850 – Turn SOURCE, select AF ON (flashing REG is shown on the display. – Turn SOURCE, select Local or Distant text) and press SOURCE. and press SOURCE. Deactivating REG: – Press EXIT. – Press EXIT. –…

  • Page 192: Radio Text

    Audio (option) Radio text Some RDS stations broadcast information, such as about programme content and artists. Hold the FM button depressed a few seconds to access any transmitted radio text, which then appears on the display. After the text is shown twice, the radio once again displays the station/frequency.

  • Page 193: Cassette Player Hu

    Audio (option) Cassette player HU-450 Cassette eject Fast forward/reverse The tape is fast forwarded If you press the button, the tape stops and the cassette by pressing and holding is ejected. Turn the and is rewound with SOURCE knob to select a «FF»…

  • Page 194: Cd Player Hu

    Audio (option) CD player HU-650 CD player The steering wheel keypad can also be used for this. Insert a CD. If there is already a CD in the player, activate it by turning the SOURCE Scanning knob or pressing the CD shortcut key. Scan plays the first ten seconds of each CD eject track.

  • Page 195: Internal Cd Changer Hu

    Audio (option) Internal CD changer HU-850 Internal CD changer Fast forward/reverse chosen the same way. «RND» is displayed as long as this function is activated. HU-850 contains an internal 6-disc CD Press and hold down changer. Press the CD shortcut key or press NOTE! If the quality of the CD does not to search within a track the SOURCE knob to activate the CD player.

  • Page 196
    Audio (option) External CD changer HU-450/650/850 – Pull out the CD cartridge and insert the Random discs. Press RND (HU-650 and – Reinsert the cartridge in the CD changer. 850) to activate the Random function. For radio HU-450, Selecting discs it is activated with the REV Select which disc is to be played by turning button.
  • Page 197: Dolby Surround Pro Logic Ii Hu

    Audio (option) Dolby Surround Pro Logic II HU-850 Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is a further 3-channel stereo – Turn SOURCE, select AUDIO SETTINGS refinement of the previous system and and press SOURCE. Select 3-channel stereo by provides a significantly improved sound –…

  • Page 198: Technical Data

    Audio (option) Technical data HU-450 HU-850 Output 4 x 25 W Output 1 x 25 W (centre loudspeaker) Impedance 4 Ohm Impedance 4 Ohm Voltage required 12 V, negative ground Voltage required 12 V, negative ground External amplifier 4 x 50 W or 4 x 75 Radio Frequency HU-850 must be connected to an external…

  • Page 199
    Audio (option)
  • Page 200: Telephone (Option)

    Telephone (option) Telephone system Operating Call options Memory functions Menu functions Miscellaneous information…

  • Page 201: Telephone System

    Telephone (option) Telephone system General rules Telephone information is always shown in the display when the telephone is activated. The • Put traffic safety first! If when driving you telephone must be deactivated in order to use require to use the privacy handset in the the buttons for radio settings, page 202.

  • Page 202
    Telephone (option)
  • Page 203: Sim Card

    Telephone (option) Operating SIM card Switching the telephone on and Active mode The telephone can only be used with a valid The telephone must be in active mode for its SIM card (Subscriber Identity Module). Your functions to be available for use (does not To switch the telephone on: Turn the ignition network operator supplies this card.

  • Page 204: Call Options

    Telephone (option) Call options Display Making and receiving calls Ending a call The display will show the function in use, for To call: dial the number and press on the To end a call, press on one of the example menu selections, messages, steering wheel or centre console keypad (or keypads or hang up the handset.

  • Page 205: Speed Dial

    Telephone (option) Call options Speed dial Storing speed dial numbers A number stored in the telephone book can be linked to a speed dial button (1-9) as follows: – Scroll with to Edit memory (menu 3) and press – Scroll to Speed dial (Menu 3.4) and press –…

  • Page 206: Call Waiting

    Telephone (option) Functions during a call The following functions are available when you have selected Three-way calling and have The following functions are available during a two calls in progress (scroll with the arrows call (scroll with the arrows and press YES to and press YES to make a selection): make a selection): Secret mode/…

  • Page 207
    Telephone (option) Call options A single two-tone signal indicates that you have received an SMS message. Volume Raise the volume with the (+) button in the steering wheel keypad. Lower the volume with the (–) button. When the telephone is activated, the steering wheel keypad only controls the telephone functions.
  • Page 208: Memory Functions

    Telephone (option) Memory functions Telephone numbers and names can be d e f 3 è é ë ê stored in either the telephone memory or the g h i 4 ì í î ï SIM card memory. When you accept a telephone call from a j k l 5 party whose number is stored in the memory, m n o 6 ñ…

  • Page 209: Menu Functions

    Telephone (option) Menu functions Use the menu function when checking The speed limiter can be disconnected using functions, changing settings and menu function 5.7. programming new functions in your system. The various menu selections will be shown in the display. Menu function Press to access the menu function.

  • Page 210
    Telephone (option) Main menus/submenus 3.3. Copy all 5.3.7. Nederlands 3.3.1. SIM to phone 5.3.8. Français FR 3.3.2. Phone to SIM 5.3.9. Français CAN Call register 3.4. Speed dial 5.3.10. Italiano 1.1. Missed calls 3.5. Empty SIM 5.3.11. Español 1.2. Received calls 3.6.
  • Page 211
    Telephone (option) Menu functions Menu options, description 1.5.2. Number of calls 3. Edit memory 1.5.3. Total time 3.1. Enter item 1. Call register 1.5.4. Clear You can store names and telephone numbers 1.1. Missed calls Resetting the call timer requires the in the telephone or SIM card memory.
  • Page 212
    Telephone (option) 3.7. Status 4.6.1. All calls (this setting only applies 5.3.11. Español See how many places in the SIM card or during the call in progress). 5.3.12. Português P telephone memory are occupied by names 4.6.2. When busy 5.3.13. Português BR and numbers.
  • Page 213
    Telephone (option) Menu functions 5.6.5. Radio Auto Suppression: Here you choose whether the volume of the radio should remain the same during telephone calls. 5.6.6. New SMS: Select whether or not you wish the telephone to notify of new SMS messages with an audible signal.
  • Page 214: Miscellaneous Information

    Telephone (option) Miscellaneous information Specifications Output SIM card Small Memory entries (Short Message Service) Data/Fax Dualband (900/1800) 1. The telephone memory contains 255 positions. The number of SIM card memory positions varies depending on your subscription. IMEI number Radio/Telephone Double SIM cards To block the telephone, you must provide The four lower buttons on the steering wheel Many network operators offer double SIM…

  • Page 215
    Telephone (option)
  • Page 216: Technical Data

    Technical data Type designation Dimensions and weights Engine specifications Capacities Fuel Catalytic converter Electrical system…

  • Page 217: Type Designation

    Technical data Type designation Whenever contacting your Volvo dealer and when ordering spare parts and accessories for your car, it makes things easier if you know your car’s type designation, vehicle identification number and engine number. Type and model year designations and chassis number.

  • Page 218: Dimensions And Weights

    Technical data Dimensions and weights Trailer with brakes: Dimensions Length: 460 cm (R:461 cm) Maximum trailer Maximum Width: 180 cm weight: towball load: Height: 143 cm 0-1200 kg 50 kg Wheelbase: 272 cm 1201-1600 kg 75 kg Front track: 156 cm Rear track: 156 cm Trailer without brakes Weights…

  • Page 219: Engine Specifications

    Technical data Engine specifications Engine type designation, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 216. Specifications Engine designation BI-FUEL BI-FUEL 2.0T 2.5T (CNG) (LPG) B5244S2 B5244S B5204T5 B5254T2 B5244SG B5244SG2 Output (kW/rps) 103/75 103/97 103/85 125/100 132/92 154/83…

  • Page 220
    Technical data Specifications Engine designation 2.4D 2.4D (7CV) B5244T5 B5254T4 D5244T D5244T2 B5244T4 D5244T3 Output (kW/rps) 162/92 191/92 120/67 96/67 85/67 220/92 220/100 (hp/rpm) 220/5000 260/5500 163/4000 130/4000 116/4000 300/5500 300/6000 Torque (Nm/rps) 350/35-67 350/35-83 340/29-50 280/29-50 280/29-46 400/33-88 350/31-100 (kpm/rpm) 35,7/2100- 35,7/2100-…
  • Page 221: Engine Oil

    Technical data Capacities Engine oil checking that the car does not have an engine oil decal on the bonnet, see page 216 The oil grade, viscosity and volume specified for location. in this table can be followed only after Volume between MIN Volume Engine variant Recommended oil grade:…

  • Page 222
    Technical data If there is an engine oil decal on the bonnet, the volume and grade specifications in this table apply. See location on page 216. Volume between MIN Volume Engine variant Recommended oil grade: Viscosity – MAX litres 2.0T B5204T5 0-1,2 litres ACEA A5/B5…
  • Page 223
    216. Never use oil additives. These can damage the engine. If the system is topped up with a different oil, contact the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for servicing.
  • Page 224
    Important! The recommended transmission fluid must be used to prevent damage to the gearbox. Do not mix with any other transmission fluid. If the transmission is topped up with a different fluid, contact an authorised Volvo workshop for servicing.
  • Page 225
    Technical data Fuel Consumption and emissions Tank Emissions of CO Consumption Engine Gearbox volume litre/100 km (g/km) litres B5244S2 Manual 5 speed (M56) Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) BIFUEL B5244SG Manual 5 speed (M56) Automatic gearbox (AW55-50) BIFUEL B5244SG2 Manual 5 speed (M56) Automatic gearbox (AW55-50) B5244S Manual 5 speed (M56)
  • Page 226
    Technical data Tank Emissions of CO Consumption Engine Gearbox volume litre/100 km (g/km) litres 2.4D D5244T3 Manual 5-speed (M56) Fuel consumption and Petrol emissions of carbon dioxide Most engines can be run with octane ratings of 91, 95 and 98 RON. Official fuel consumption figures are based on a standard driving cycle in accordance •…
  • Page 227: Catalytic Converter

    Technical data Catalytic converter Lambda-sond oxygen sensor The Lambda-sond is part of a control system intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel economy. An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This value is fed into an electronic system that continuously controls the injectors.

  • Page 228: Electrical System

    Technical data Electrical system General 12-V system with voltage regulated AC generator. Single pole system in which the chassis and engine block are used as conductors. The negative pole is connected to the chassis. The car is equipped with an extra ground lead to reduce the magnetic fields.

  • Page 229: Fog Lamps

    1. Main beam 2. Dipped beam 3. Bi-Xenon 4. Fog lamp, front 4. Fog lamp, front (S60 R) 5. Front position lamps, front parking lamps, front W 2.1 x 9.5d side marker lamps, rear courtesy lighting 6. Direction indicators, front/rear BAU 15s 7.

  • Page 230
    Booster cushion, integrated ……27 Courtesy lighting ……… 169 Boot lid, locking ……….39 Cruise control ……….47 A/C …………..61 Brake light ………….168 ABS, braking system ……..104 Bulb holder …………168 Active chassis ……… 38, 40 Bulbs …………..228 Deadlocks ……….39, 89 Adaptive system ……….
  • Page 231: Headlamps

    Heated front seats ……… 61 Heated rear window ……..62 Fan, A/C …………62 Lambda-sond ……….226 Heating/Cooling, A/C ……..61 Fan, ECC …………63 Lighting …………163 HU-450, overview ……..178 Floor mats …………77 Lighting panel ……….41 HU-650, overview ……..179 Fluids ………….. 224 Loading …………

  • Page 232: Direction Indicators

    Parking …………108 Remote control functions ……85 Storage spaces in the passenger Parking assistance ………39 Remote control, battery replacement ..86 compartment ……..75, 76, 78 Parking brake ……….48 RME …………..156 Storing radio stations ……. 185, 186 Parking heater ……….67 Rustproofing, treatment and repair ..150 Sunroof ………….54 Parking heater, battery and fuel ….68…

  • Page 233
    Vanity mirror ……….170 Vehicle data ……….152 Viscosity …………220 Volume, telephone ……..206 Volvo Cars and the environment ….3 Warning symbols ………..33 «Warning!» texts ……….2 Warning triangle ………. 134 Washer fluid ……….158 Washing the car ………. 146 Waxing and polishing ………
  • Page 234
    TP 7505 (English). AT 0446. Printed in Sweden, Elanders Infologistics Väst AB, Mölnlycke 2004…

Посмотреть инструкция для Volvo S60 (2007) бесплатно. Руководство относится к категории автомобили, 6 человек(а) дали ему среднюю оценку 8.9. Руководство доступно на следующих языках: русский. У вас есть вопрос о Volvo S60 (2007) или вам нужна помощь? Задайте свой вопрос здесь

Не можете найти ответ на свой вопрос в руководстве? Вы можете найти ответ на свой вопрос ниже, в разделе часто задаваемых вопросов о Volvo S60 (2007).

Как перевести мили в километры?

1 миля равна 1,609344 километрам, а 1 километр — 0,62137119 милям.

Где я могу узнать идентификационный номер транспортного средства Volvo?

Место размещения идентификационного номера транспортного средства зависит от марки и типа транспортного средства. Номер может быть выбит на раме транспортного средства или указан на номерном знаке. Чтобы узнать место расположения идентификационного номера транспортного средства лучше всего ознакомиться с руководством по эксплуатации Volvo S60 (2007).

Что такое идентификационный номер транспортного средства (VIN)?

Идентификационный номер транспортного средства — уникальный для каждого транспортного средства идентификационный номер. Аббревиатура VIN расшифровывается как «Vehicle Identification Number» (Идентификационный номер транспортного средства).

Когда транспортному средству Volvo требуется техническое обслуживание?

Регулярное техническое обслуживание необходимо всем транспортным средствам. С информацией о том, как часто необходимо проходить техническое обслуживание и чему именно стоит уделять особое внимание можно ознакомиться в инструкции по техническому обслуживанию. Как правило, транспортное средство требует технического обслуживания каждые 2 года или 30 000 километров пробега.

Когда следует заменять тормозную жидкость на Volvo?

Тормозную жидкость рекомендуется менять каждые два года.

В чем разница между топливом E10 и E5?

В топливе E10 содержится до десяти процентов этанола, в то время как в E5 содержится менее пяти процентов. Соответственно, топливо E10 менее вредит окружающей среде.

Одна или несколько дверей не открываются изнутри. Что мне делать?

Скорее всего, замок оснащен защитой от детей и поэтому не может быть открыт изнутри. Процедура открытия замка с защитой от детей зависит от марки и типа замка.

Автомобильный радиоприемник не включается, что делать?

Если автомобильный радиоприемник не включен, на него не будет подаваться питание. Убедитесь, что красный провод подключен к контактному источнику питания, а желтый провод — к источнику питания постоянной мощности.

Инструкция Volvo S60 (2007) доступно в русский?

Да, руководствоVolvo S60 (2007) доступно врусский .

Не нашли свой вопрос? Задайте свой вопрос здесь

DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope that you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and com- fort of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements.

In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and maintenance information contained in this Owners Manual.

Contents

2

00 Introd Introductio Volvo Car C environme

02 Instruments and controls Overview, left-hand drive car …………36 Overview, right-hand drive car ……….38 Combined instrument panel ………….40 Indicator and warning symbols ………41 Information display ………………………44 Switches in the centre console ………45 Lighting panel ……………………………..49 Left-hand stalk switch ………………….51 Trip computer ………………………………52 Right-hand stalk switch ………………..53 Cruise control (option) ………………….55 Steering wheel adjustment, parking brake ………………………………………….56 Electrical socket, cigarette lighter …..57 Power windows ……………………………58 Rearview and door mirrors ……………61 Power sunroof (option) ………………….65

uction n …………………………………..6 orporation and the

nt…………………………………..7

01 Safety Seatbelts …………………………………… 12 Airbag system ……………………………. 15 Airbags (SRS) …………………………….. 16 Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS) ………………………………………… 19 Side airbags (SIPS bags) ……………… 21 Inflatable Curtain (IC) ………………….. 23 WHIPS ………………………………………. 24 When the systems deploy ……………. 26 Child safety ……………………………….. 27

Contents

3

03 Clim General i control .. Manual c Electronic (option) . Air distrib Fuel-drive

05 Locks and alarm Keys and remote controls ……………..96 Locking and unlocking …………………99 Child safety locks ……………………… 103 Alarm (option) …………………………… 104

ate control nformation on climate …………………………………….. 70 limate control, AC ………….. 72 climate control, ECC

…………………………………….. 74 ution ……………………………. 77 n heater (option) …………… 78

04 Interior Front seats ………………………………….82 Interior lighting …………………………….84 Storage spaces in the passenger compartment ……………………………..86 Rear seat …………………………………….90 Cargo area ………………………………….92

Contents

4

06 Starti General … Refuelling Starting th Manual ge Automatic Brake syst Stability an system …. Active cha Parking as Towing and Start assis Driving wit Towing equ Detachable Load on th Adjusting h BLIS (Blind System)

08 Car care Cleaning ……………………………………168 Touching up paintwork ………………..171 Rustproofing ……………………………..172

ng and driving …………………………………. 110 …………………………………. 113 e car …………………………. 115 arbox ………………………… 118 gearbox ……………………. 119 em ……………………………. 123 d traction control …………………………………. 125 ssis FOUR-C …………… 127 sistance …………………….. 128 recovery ………………….. 130

tance ………………………… 132 h a trailer ………………….. 133 ipment …………………….. 135 towbar ……………………. 137 e roof ……………………….. 142 eadlamp pattern ………. 144 Spot Information

option ……………………….. 149

07 Wheels and tyres General ……………………………………. 154 Tyre pressure ……………………………. 157 Warning triangle and spare wheel .. 159 Tyre pressure monitoring (option) .. 161 Changing wheels ………………………. 163

Contents

5

09 Main Volvo ser Self-main Bonnet a Diesel …. Oils and Wiper bla Battery . Replacing Fuses ….

11 Specifications Type designation ………………………..242 Dimensions and weights ……………243 Engine specifications …………………244 Engine oil ………………………………….246 Fluids and lubricants ………………….249 Fuel ………………………………………….250 Catalytic converter …………………….253 Electrical system ……………………….254

tenance and service vice ……………………………..176 tenance ……………………… 177 nd engine compartment .. 178 …………………………………… 179 fluids ………………………….. 180 des ……………………………. 184 …………………………………… 185 bulbs ……………………….. 188

…………………………………… 195

10 Infotainment system Overview HU-450 ……………………….206 Overview HU-650………………………. 207 Overview HU-850………………………. 208 Audio functions HU-450/650/850 …209 Audio functions HU-450 ……………..210 Audio functions HU-650/850 ……….211 Radio functions HU-450/650/850 …212 Radio functions HU-450 ……………..213 Radio functions HU-650/850 ……….214 Radio functions HU-450/650/850 …215 Cassette player HU-450 ………………220 CD player HU-650 ………………………221 Internal CD changer HU-850 ……….222 External CD changer HU-450/650/850 (option) …………….223 Dolby Surround Pro Logic II HU-850 …………………………………….224 Technical data ……………………………225 Phone functions (option) ……………..226 Call options ……………………………….229 Memory functions ………………………232 Menu functions ………………………….234 Miscellaneous information …………..239

Introduction

6

Intro

Owner

A good is to rea your firs portunit function in differe use of a

Please p tions co

The equ manual tion to s describe and cert

W

«Warni risk of structio

IM

«Impor to the c being f

duction

s Manual

way of getting to know your new car d the owners manual, ideally before t journey. This will give you the op- y to familiarise yourself with new s, to see how best to handle the car nt situations, and to make the best

ll the cars features.

ay attention to the safety instruc- ntained in the manual.

ipment described in the owners is not present in all models. In addi- tandard equipment, this manual also s options (factory fitted equipment) ain accessories (extra equipment).

The specifications, design features and illus- trations in this owners manual are not bind- ing. We reserve the right to make modifica- tions without prior notice.

Volvo Car Corporation ARNING

ng!» texts indicate where there is a personal injury in the event of the in- ns not being followed.

PORTANT

tant!» texts indicate a risk of damage ar in the event of the instructions not ollowed.

NOTE

Volvo cars are adapted for the varying re- quirements of different markets, as well as for national or local legal requirements and regulations.

Introduction

7

Volvo Cars and the environment

Volvo C environ

Environm the thre erations also bel conside

Your Vo environm factured source- Car Cor the ISO

Fuel consumption Volvo cars have competitive fuel consump- tion in each of their respective classes. Low- er fuel consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon di- oxide.

It is possible for the driver to influence fuel consumption. For more information read un- der the heading Reducing environmental im- pact on page 9.

ar Corporations mental philosophy

ental care, safety and quality are e core values which influence all op- of the Volvo Car Corporation. We ieve that our customers share our ration for the environment.

lvo complies with strict international ental standards and is also manu-

in one of the cleanest and most re- efficient plants in the world. Volvo poration has global certification to 14001 environmental standard,

which supports work within the area of the environment.

EPI (Environmental Product Information) is supplied for all Volvo models. You can now compare the environmental impact of differ- ent models and engines during the entire life- cycle.

Read more at www.volvocars.com/EPI.

Introduction

8

Volvo

Efficien Your Vo concept that enc ment as trol. In m well belo

In additi PremAir ground- the ozon ozone c converte

Clean a compa A passe dust and compar

A sophis (Interior incomin fic outsi

The sys and a ca

Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life for the car with low fuel consumption, and this way you contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvos work- shops are entrusted with the repair and maintenance of the car, it becomes part of our system. We make clear demands regard- ing the way in which our workshops are de- signed in order to prevent spills and dis- charges into the environment. Our workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools re- quired to guarantee good environmental care.

1 Option PremAir Engelha

2 Option

Cars and the environment

t emission control lvo is manufactured following the Clean inside and out a concept ompasses a clean interior environ- well as highly efficient emission con- any cases the exhaust emissions are w the applicable standards.

on there is a special radiator coating, 1, which can convert hazardous level ozone into pure oxygen when e passes the radiator. The higher the

ontent in the air the more ozone is d.

ir in the passenger rtment nger compartment filter prevents pollen from entering the passenger

tment via the air intake.

ticated air quality system, IAQS2 Air Quality System) ensures that the g air is cleaner than the air in the traf- de.

tem consists of an electronic sensor rbon filter. The incoming air is moni-

tored continuously and if there is an increase in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example.

The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon filter.

Textile standard The interior of a Volvo is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma suffer- ers. All of our upholstery and interior textiles are tested with respect to certain unhealthy substances and allergens as well as emis- sions. This means that all textiles fulfil the re- quirements in the ko-Tex 100 standard3, a major advance towards a healthier passen- ger compartment environment.

ko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car- pets, thread and fabrics for example. The leather in the upholstery undergoes chromi- um-free tanning with natural plant substanc- es and fulfils the certification requirements.

for 5-cylinder engines. is a registered trademark of rd Corporation.

3 More information on www.oekotex.com

Introduction

9

Reduc You can for exam chasing by servi ing to th

The follo for the e

Decre ECO

Since box in ance cantl cons shou medi

Remo the g cons

Is you heate starti sump

Drive

ing environmental impact help reduce environmental impact, ple, by driving economically, by pur-

eco-labelled car care products and cing and maintaining the car accord- e instructions in the owners manual.

wing hints will help you to do your bit nvironment:

ase fuel consumption by choosing tyre pressure, see page 157. a roof load and ski crease air resist-

, leading to signifi- y higher fuel umption, they ld be removed im- ately after use. ve unnecessary items from the car —

reater the load the higher the fuel umption. r car equipped with an engine block r? If so, use it for a few hours before ng from cold to reduce fuel con- tion and exhaust emissions. gently and avoid braking too hard.

Drive in the highest gear possible. Low engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption.

Ease back on the acceler- ator on downhill gradi- ents.

Use engine braking to slow down. Avoid idling. Take consideration of local

regulations. Switch off the engine in longer stationary traffic.

Always dispose of envi- ronmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oils, in an environ- mentally safe manner. If uncertain, consult an au- thorised Volvo workshop for advice.

Service your car regularly. High speed increases consumption con-

siderably due to increased wind resist- ance. A doubling of speed increases wind resistance four times.

These hints will help you to reduce your fuel consumption without increasing your travel time or lessening the enjoyment of driving. Apart from being kind to your car, youll be saving money — and the Earths resources.

10

Seatbelts …………………………………………………………………………………….. 12 Airbag system ……………………………………………………………………………… 15 Airbags (SRS) ………………………………………………………………………………. 16 Activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS) ………………………………………….. 19 Side airbags (SIPS bags) ……………………………………………………………….21 Inflatable Curtain (IC) …………………………………………………………………….23 WHIPS …………………………………………………………………………………………24 When the systems deploy ………………………………………………………………26 Child safety ………………………………………………………………………………….27

01 Safety

12

Seat01

Always

Tensioni positione

Heavy b quences that all p

Putting Pull t

press «click

Releas Press

retrac

WARNING

Each belt is intended for one person only.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the belt yourself. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop. If the belt has been subjected to a major load, such as in a collision, the entire belt must be replaced. Some of the belts protective properties may have been lost even if the belt does not appear damaged. The belt should also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new belt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced belt.

belts

use a seatbelt

ng the hip strap. The belt must be d low down.

raking can have serious conse- if seatbelts are not used. Ensure assengers use their seatbelts.

on a seatbelt he belt out slowly and secure it by ing the buckle into the lock. A loud » indicates that the belt has locked.

ing the belt the red lock button and let the belt t. If the belt does not retract fully,

feed the belt in by hand so that it does not hang lose.

The belt locks and cannot be withdrawn if it is pulled out too quickly. during braking and acceleration. if the car leans heavily. It is important that the belt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position.

Keep in mind the following: do not use clips or anything else that can

prevent the belt from fitting properly. ensure the belt is not be twisted or caught

on anything. the hip strap must be positioned low down

(not over the abdomen). tension the hip strap over the lap by

pulling the diagonal shoulder belt as illustrated.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

01 Safety

13

Seatbelts 01

Seatbe

The sea bined in view mir front sea The sea 6 secon

If the dr buckled es on ag 10 km/h below 5

If the se vates w

Seatbelts and pregnancy

The seat belt should always be worn during pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the correct way. The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed be- tween the breasts and to the side of the ab- domen. The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack from the belt and insure that it fits close to the body without any twists.

As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of

lt reminder

tbelt warning symbol in the com- strument panel and above the rear- ror illuminates until the driver and t passenger buckle their seatbelts.

tbelt reminder switches off after ds if speed is below 10 km/h.

iver or front seat passenger have not their seatbelts, the reminder switch- ain when the speed exceeds and switches off if the speed drops km/h.

atbelt is released, the function reacti- hen speed exceeds 10 km/h.

The seatbelt reminder is intended for an adult sitting in the front seat. If a belt-fitted child seat is fitted in the front seat, the seatbelt re- minder does not switch on.

01 Safety

14

Seat01

the vehi must be als and they sho large a d abdome

belts

cle as they drive (which means they able to easily operate the foot ped- steering wheel). Within this context, uld strive to position the seat with as istance as possible between their n and the steering wheel.

Seatbelt tensioner

Label on seatbelts with seatbelt tensioner.

All the seatbelts (except the centre rear belt) are equipped with belt tensioners. A mecha- nism in the belt tensioner tightens the belt around the body in the event of a sufficiently violent collision. This provides more effective restraint for passengers.

01 Safety

15

Airbag system 01

Warnin instrum

The airb by the s symbol luminate position approx. system1

1 Include and IC.

g symbol in combined ent panel

ag system1 is continually monitored ystem control module. The warning in the combined instrument panel il- s when the ignition key is turned to I, II or III. The symbol goes out after seven seconds provided the airbag is fault-free.

As well as the warning sym- bol, a message may appear on the information display in appropriate cases. If the warning symbol malfunc- tions, the warning triangle il- luminates and the message SRS AIRBAG SERVICE URGENT appears in the in- formation display. Contact an

authorised Volvo workshop urgently.

s SRS and seatbelt tensioner, SIPS

WARNING

If the warning symbol for the Airbag system remains on or illuminates while driving, it means that the Airbag system is not func- tioning fully. The symbol can indicate a fault in the seatbelt tensioner system, SIPS, the SRS system or the IC system. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

01 Safety

16

Airba01

Airbag

The car Restrain supplem seatbelt of the st marked

W

The se belt is may di airbag

WARNING

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the air- bag (SRS) is activated. For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS) see page 19. Never allow a child to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. No one shorter than 140 cm should sit in the front passen- ger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the life of the child.

gs (SRS)

(SRS) on the drivers side

has an SRS airbag (Supplemental t System) in the steering wheel to ent the protection afforded by the

. This airbag is fitted into the centre eering wheel. The steering wheel is SRS AIRBAG.

Passenger airbag (SRS)

The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental Re- straint System) to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt. The passenger air- bag1 is fitted behind a panel above the glove- box. This panel is marked SRS AIRBAG.

ARNING

atbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- not used or is used incorrectly, this minish the protection provided by the in the event of a collision.

1 Not all cars have a passenger airbag (SRS). This can be unselected when the car is ordered.

01 Safety

17

Airbags (SRS) 01

SRS sy

SRS sys

The sys A suffici sors and gas. To flates w smoke e pletely n inflation within te

WARNING

Repairs must only be performed by an au- thorised Volvo workshop. Work on the SRS system can cause mal- function and result in serious personal injury.

stem

tem, left-hand drive.

tem consists of airbags and sensors. ently violent collision trips the sen- the airbag(s) are inflated with hot

cushion the impact, the airbag de- hen compressed. When this occurs, scapes into the car. This is com- ormal. The entire process, including and deflation of the airbag, occurs nths of a second.

SRS system, right-hand drive.

NOTE

The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether the seatbelts on the driver and passenger side are used. It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The SRS system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts ac- cordingly so that one or more airbags is de- ployed.

NOTE

The airbags have a function whereby their capacities are adapted to the collision force to which the car is subjected.

01 Safety

18

Airba01

Location drive and

W

Never steerin gloveb Object tioned BAG p area af

gs (SRS)

of the passenger airbag in left-hand right-hand drive cars

ARNING

interfere with SRS components in the g wheel or the panel above the ox. s and accessories must not be posi- or glued on or near the SRS AIR- anel (above the glovebox) or in the fected by a deployed airbag.

01 Safety

19

ing/deactivating the airbag (SRS) 01

PACOS

Indicator (SRS) is

The airb can be d necessa for exam

Indicat A text m that the deactiva

WARNING

Activated airbag (passenger seat): Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. This also ap- plies to anyone shorter than 140 cm. Deactivated airbag (passenger seat): No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

Activat

(option)

showing that the passenger airbag deactivated.

ag (SRS) for the front passenger seat eactivated using a switch. This is ry if a child seat is to be fitted there ple.

or essage on the roof panel indicates passenger airbag (SRS) is ted.

Activating/deactivating

Switch for PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).

The switch is located on the passenger end of the dashboard and is accessible when the passenger door is open. Check that the switch is in the required position. Volvo rec- ommends that that the ignition key is used to change position. (Other items with a shape similar to a key can be used).

WARNING

If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag (SRS), but does not have PACOS, the airbag will always be activated.

01 Safety

20

Activ01

Switch

Switch fo

ON = Ai in this p can sit i children cushion

ating/deactivating the airbag (SRS)

position

r SRS in ON position.

rbag (SRS) activated. With the switch osition, persons taller than 140 cm n the front passenger seat, but never in a child seat or on a booster .

Switch for SRS in OFF position.

OFF = Airbag (SRS) is deactivated. With the switch in this position, children in a child seat or on a booster cushion can sit in the front passenger seat, but never persons taller than 140 cm.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the text message in the roof panel indicates that the airbag (SRS) is de- activated and the airbag warning symbol is displayed in the combined instrument pan- el. This indicates that there has been a se- vere malfunction. Visit an authorised Volvo workshop urgently.

01 Safety

21

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

Side ai

Side airb

A large p transfer tion Sys roof and The side senger s an impo bags are

Child seats and side airbags The side airbag does not diminish the protec- tion provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion.

A child seat or booster cushion can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an activated1 pas- senger airbag.

WARNING

Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side air- bag.

WARNING

Use only Volvo genuine car seat covers, or seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side air bags.

1 For information on activated/deactivated air- bag (SRS) see page 19

rbags SIPS bag

ag locations.

roportion of the collision force is red by the SIPS (Side Impact Protec- tem) to beams, pillars, the floor, the other structural parts of the body. airbags at the drivers and front pas- eats protect the chest area and are rtant part of the SIPS. The side air- located in the front seat backrests.

Inflated side airbag.

WARNING

Side airbags are a supplement to the SIPS system. Always wear a seatbelt.

WARNING

Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Work on the SIPS system can cause mal- function and result in serious personal injury.

01 Safety

22

Side 01

SIPS b

Drivers

The SIP bags an sion trip are infla occupan cushion The side the side

airbags (SIPS bags)

ags

side

S bag system consists of side air- d sensors. A sufficiently violent colli- s the sensors and the side airbags ted. The airbag inflates between the t and the door panel and thereby

s the initial impact while deflating. airbag is normally only deployed on of the collision.

Passenger side

01 Safety

23

Inflatable Curtain (IC) 01

Proper

The infla is a sup ted in th roof and passeng ed by se olent co flates. T the drive heads o collision

WARNING

Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under the top edge of the rear passenger windows. Otherwise, the intended protec- tion of the inflatable curtain, which is hidden in the headlining, may be compromised.

WARNING

The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always wear your seatbelt.

ties

table curtain, IC (Inflatable Curtain), plement to the SIPS system. It is fit- e headlining along both sides of the protects both front and rear seat ers. The inflatable curtain is activat- nsors in the event of a sufficiently vi- llision and the inflatable curtain in- he inflatable curtain helps to prevent r and passengers from striking their

n the inside of the car during a .

WARNING

Never hang or fasten anything on the roof handles. The hook is only intended for light outer garments (not for hard objects such as umbrellas). Do not screw or fit anything to the headlin- ing, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Only use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.

01 Safety

24

WHIP01

Protec

The whi consists specially front sea end coll the colli vehicle a

WHIPS system and child seats/ booster cushions The WHIPS system does not diminish the protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion.

Correct seating position For the best possible protection, the driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as pos- sible between the head and the head restraint.

W

The W seatbe

S

tion against whiplash injury WHIPS

plash protection system (WHIPS) of energy absorbing backrests and designed head restraints for the ts. The system is actuated by a rear-

ision, where the angle and speed of sion, and the nature of the colliding ll have an influence.

Properties of the seat When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front seat backrests fall backward to alter the position of the driver and front seat passen- ger. This diminishes the risk of whiplash injury.

ARNING

HIPS system is a supplement to the lts. Always wear your seatbelt.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

01 Safety

25

WHIPS 01

Do not

W

Do not rear se rest. M functio

WARNING

If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked by an authorised Volvo workshop. Part of the WHIPS systems protective ca- pacity may have been lost even if the seat appears to be undamaged. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked even after a minor rear-end collision.

obstruct the WHIPS system

ARNING

squeeze rigid objects between the at cushion and the front seat back- ake sure you do not to obstruct the n of the WHIPS system.

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest.

01 Safety

26

When01

If the air lowing i

Have Volvo ploye

Have place tem.

Alwa

Syste

Seatbe nd/or overturning. Airbags

Side ai

Inflatab

Whipla

1The bo such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed

NO

The SR tems a sion

WARNING

Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are de- ployed can cause skin and eye irritation after intensive exposure. In case of irrita- tion, wash with cold water. The rapid de- ployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction injury and burns to the skin.

the systems deploy

bags have been deployed, the fol- s recommended:

the car transported to an authorised workshop. Do not drive with de- d airbags. an authorised Volvo workshop re- components in the cars safety sys-

ys contact a doctor.

m Triggered

lt tensioner In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident a SRS In a frontal collision1

rbags SIPS In a side-impact accident1

le Curtain IC In a side-impact accident1

sh protection WHIPS In a rear-end collision

dywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.

TE

S, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys- re deployed only once during a colli-

WARNING

The airbag control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, discon- nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Have the car transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.

01 Safety

27

Child safety 01

Childre safely

The pos choice o weight a page 29

Children correctl child to

Volvos signed f equipme points a tioned a

You ma

a chil front seng

a rear uses

Location of airbag decal in door opening on front passenger side.

NO

Regula childre try. Ch

1 For info bag (SR

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the air- bag (SRS) is activated1. Failure to follow this advice can endanger the life of the child.

1 For information on activated/deactivated air- bag (SRS) see page 19.

n should sit comfortably and

ition of a child in the car and the f equipment is dictated by the childs nd size, for more information see .

of all ages and sizes must always sit y secured in the car. Never allow a sit on the knee of a passenger.

own child safety equipment is de- or your car. Use Volvo genuine nt to best ensure that the mounting

nd attachments are correctly posi- nd are sufficiently strong.

y place:

d seat or booster cushion on the passenger seat, provided the pas- er airbag is not activated1. -facing child seat in the rear seat that the back of the front seat as support.

Child seats and airbags

Child seats and airbags are not compatible.

Always place a child in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated1. A child in a child seat on the front passenger seat may suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.

TE

tions regarding the placement of n in cars vary from country to coun- eck what laws apply.

rmation on activated/deactivated air- S) see page 19.

WARNING

Persons shorter than 140 cm may only sit in the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated.

01 Safety

28

Child01

Decal loc

safety

ated on dashboard end face. Decal located on instrument panel end face (Australia only).

01 Safety

29

Child safety 01

Placem

Weigh Centre rear seat

<10 kg (09 m

.

rt

Rear-facing child seat, secured with seatbelt, support legs and straps. L: Type approval no. E5 03135

918 kg (936 m

.

rt

Rear-facing child seat, secured with seatbelt, support legs and straps. L: Type approval no. E5 03135

ent of children in the car

t/age Front seat1 Outer rear seat

onths) Alternatives: Rear-facing child seat, secured

with seatbelt. L 2: Type approval no. E5 03160

Rear-facing child seat, secured with Isofix mounting. L: Type approval no. E5 03162

Rear-facing child seat, secured with seatbelt and straps. L: Type approval no. E5 03135

Alternatives: Rear-facing child seat, secured

with seatbelt and support legs L: Type approval no. E5 03160

Rear-facing child seat, secured with Isofix mounting and suppo legs. L: Type approval no. E5 03162

Rear-facing child seat, secured with seatbelt, support legs and straps. L: Type approval no. E5 03135

onths) Alternatives: Rear-facing child seat, secured

with seatbelt. L: Type approval no. E5 03161

Rear-facing child seat, secured with Isofix mounting. L: Type approval no. E5 03163

Rear-facing child seat, secured with seatbelt and straps. L: Type approval no. E5 03135

Alternatives: Rear-facing child seat, secured

with seatbelt and support legs L: Type approval no. E5 03161

Rear-facing child seat, secured with Isofix mounting and suppo legs. L: Type approval no. E5 03163

Rear-facing child seat, secured with seatbelt, support legs and straps. L: Type approval no. E5 03135

01 Safety

30

Child01

1536 k (312 y

Alternatives: Booster cushion with or without

backrest. L: Type approval no. E5 03139

Integrated booster cushion3. B4: Type approval no. E5 03140

1For inf 2L: Suit ited, semi-universal or universal. 3Option 4B: Inte

Weigh Centre rear seat

safety

g ears)

Booster cushion with or without backrest. L: Type approval no. E5 03139

Booster cushion with or without backrest. L: Type approval no. E5 03139

ormation on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS) see page 16.

able for certain child seats as listed in the specified type approval. Child seats can be vehicle-specific, lim

grated and approved for this age group

t/age Front seat1 Outer rear seat

01 Safety

31

Child safety 01

Integra

Volvos outer re provide bined w cushion between

Folding out the booster cushion

fold down the booster cushion. pull apart the Velcro. raise the upper portion back into place.

Check that: the seatbelt is in contact with the childs

body and is not slack or twisted. the belt lies correctly over the shoulder. the lap belt is low over the pelvis for

optimum protection. the belt does not touch the childs throat

or lie below the shoulder. Carefully adjust the position of the head

restraint to suit the child.

ted booster cushions (option)

integrated booster cushions for the ar seats are specially designed to optimum safety for children. Com- ith the regular seatbelts, the booster s are approved for children weighing 15 and 36 kg.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the air- bag (SRS) is activated. No one shorter than 140 cm should sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.1

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger the life of the child.

1For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS) see page 16.

01 Safety

32

Child01

W

Repair formed Do not to the b If an in subjec junctio cushio booste it may tion. Th placed

safety

Folding in the booster cushion

Fold down the upper section (A). Fasten the Velcro (B). Raise the booster cushion into the rear

seat backrest (C).

ARNING

or replacement should only be per- by an authorised Volvo workshop. make any modifications or additions ooster cushion.

tegrated booster cushion has been ted to a major load, such as in con- n with a collision, the entire booster n must be replaced. Even if the r cushion appears to be undamaged, not afford the same level of protec- e booster cushion must also be re-

if it is heavily worn.

NOTE

Make sure that both sections of the booster cushion are secured with the Velcro strap (B) before folding down. Otherwise the upper section (A) could become trapped in the rear seat backrest (C) when the booster cushion is folded out again.

01 Safety

33

Child safety 01

Fitting

Volvo ha signed f

When us on the m ting inst

Do no to the rails o edge

Allow again cars w the a

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats (option)

The outer rear seats have ISOFIX attachment points for child seats. Contact a Volvo dealer for further information on child safety equipment.

W

Booste braces on the must n seatbe Do not seat to

a child seat

s child safety products that are de- or and tested by Volvo.

ing other products that are available arket, it is important to read the fit-

ructions included with the product.

t attach the straps for the child seat horizontal adjustment bar, springs, r beams under the seat. Sharp

s can damage the straps. the back of the child seat to rest st the dashboard. This applies to ithout a passenger airbag, or where

irbag is deactivated.

ARNING

r cushions/child seats with steel or some other design that could rest seatbelt buckles opening button ot be used, as they could cause the lt buckle to open accidentally. allow the upper section of the child rest against the windscreen.

WARNING

Never place the child seat in the front seat if the car is equipped with an activated1 front passenger airbag. If problems arise when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

1For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS) see page 19.

34

Overview, left-hand drive car ………………………………………………………….36 Overview, right-hand drive car ………………………………………………………..38 Combined instrument panel ……………………………………………………………40 Indicator and warning symbols ……………………………………………………….41 Information display ………………………………………………………………………..44 Switches in the centre console ……………………………………………………….45 Lighting panel ……………………………………………………………………………….49 Left-hand stalk switch ……………………………………………………………………51 Trip computer ……………………………………………………………………………….52 Right-hand stalk switch …………………………………………………………………53 Cruise control (option) ……………………………………………………………………55 Steering wheel adjustment, parking brake ………………………………………..56 Electrical socket, cigarette lighter ……………………………………………………57 Power windows …………………………………………………………………………….58 Rearview and door mirrors ……………………………………………………………..61 Power sunroof (option) …………………………………………………………………..65

02 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

02 Instruments and controls

36

Over

02

view, left-hand drive car

02 Instruments and controls

37

Overview, left-hand drive car

02

1. Fog 2. Hea 3. Rea 4. Dire 5. Crui 6. Horn 7. Com 8. Keyp 9. Wind 10.Park 11.Swit 12.Clim 13.Aud 14.Elec 15.Haz

40.Active chassis-Four C (S60 R)

lamps dlamps, position/parking lights r fog lamp ction indicators, beam selection se control

bined instrument panel ad for phone/audio screen wipers ing brake (handbrake) ch panel ate control io system tric socket, Cigarette lighter ard warning flashers

16.Glovebox 17.Panel vents 18.Display 19.Temperature gauge 20.Odometer, trip meter/cruise control 21.Speedometer 22.Direction indicators 23.Tachometer 24.Outside temperature, clock, gear

position 25.Fuel gauge 26. Indicator and warning symbols 27.Panel vents 28. Instrument lighting 29.Headlamp levelling 30.Lighting panel 31.Reading lamps 32. Interior lighting 33.Control, sunroof 34.Seatbelt reminder 35.Rearview mirror 36.Lock button, for all doors 37.Blocking power windows in the rear

doors 38.Controls, power windows 39.Controls, power door mirrors

02 Instruments and controls

38

Over

02

view, right-hand drive car

02 Instruments and controls

39

Overview, right-hand drive car

02

Drivers

1. Rear 2. Hea 3. Fog 4. Wind 5. Keyp 6. Horn 7. Com 8. Crui 9. Dire 10.Park 11.Elec 12.Clim 13.Aud 14.Swit

39.Controls, power door mirrors 40.Active chassis-Four C (S60 R)

door control panel

fog lamp dlamps, position/parking lights lamps screen wipers ad for phone/audio

bined instrument panel se control ction indicators, beam selection ing brake (handbrake) tric socket, Cigarette lighter ate control io system ch panel

15.Hazard warning flashers 16.Glovebox 17.Panel vents 18. Indicator and warning symbols 19.Fuel gauge 20.Outside temperature, clock, gear

position 21.Tachometer 22.Direction indicators 23.Speedometer 24.Odometer, trip meter/cruise control 25.Temperature gauge 26.Display 27.Panel vents 28.Lighting panel 29.Headlamp levelling 30. Instrument lighting 31.Reading lamps 32. Interior lighting 33.Control, sunroof 34.Seatbelt reminder 35.Rearview mirror 36.Lock button, for all doors 37.Blocking power windows in the rear

doors 38.Controls, power windows

02 Instruments and controls

40

Com

02

1. Temp Displays ing syst high and messag mind tha grille red side tem

2. Disp Informa shown i

3. Spee Shows t

7. Main beam on/off

8. Warning symbol If a fault arises, the symbol lights up and a message is shown in the display.

9. Tachometer Indicates engine speed in thousands of revo- lutions per minute (RPM). Do not allow the needle of the tachometer to enter the red field.

10. Automatic gearbox indicator The selected gearshift programme is dis- played here. If you have Geartronic

bined instrument panel

erature gauge the temperature of the engine cool-

em. If the temperature is abnormally the needle enters the red zone, a

e is shown in the display. Bear in t extra lamps in front of the radiator uce the cooling capacity at high out- perature and high engine loads.

lay tion and warning messages are n the display.

dometer he speed of the car.

4. Trip meter, T1 and T2 The trip meters are used for measuring short distances. The right-hand digit displays tenths of a kilometre. Press the button for more than 2 seconds to reset. Switch be- tween trip meters with one quick press of the button.

5. Cruise control indicator See page 55.

6. Trip meter The odometer indicates the total distance the car has travelled.

02 Instruments and controls

41

Indicator and warning symbols

02

automat ual func played.

11. Out Displays perature snowfla This sym road sur tionary, display perature

12. Clo Turn the

13. Fue When th approxim the tank

14. Indi

15. Dire

Warning symbols in the centre of the instrument panel

These symbols are lit with a red or amber glow depending on the severity of the fault.

Red symbol: Stop the car in a safe place. Do not drive

the car further. Read the information on the information

display. Rectify the fault as instructed or contact

an authorised Volvo workshop. Symbol and message text are visible until the fault has been rectified.

ic gearbox and drive using the man- tion, the current manual gear is dis-

side temperature gauge outside temperature. When the tem- lies between +2 C to 5 C, a

ke symbol is shown in the display. bol serves as a warning for slippery

faces. When the car is or was sta- the outside temperature gauge may a higher reading than the actual tem- .

ck button to set the clock.

l gauge e lamp in the instrument panel lights, ately 8 litres of usable fuel remain in

.

cator and warning symbols

ction indicators left/right.

Indicator and warning symbols

All indicator and warning symbols1 illuminate when the ignition key is turned to position II before starting. This is to check that the sym- bols are working. When the engine starts, all the symbols should go out except the hand- brake symbol, which extinguishes when the handbrake is released.

If the engine does not start within five seconds, all symbols extin- guish except the symbols for a fault in the cars emissions sys- tem and for low oil pressure. Cer- tain symbols may have no func- tion, depending on the cars specifications.

1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 180.

02 Instruments and controls

42

Indic

02

Yellow Read Actio The mes button, cally aft

When th TIME FO the sym cleared automat

ABS fa

Stop the e

Resta If the

drivin If the

drive have

Seatbelt reminder This lamp lights until the driver buckles up.

Low oil pressure1 If the lamp illuminates while driv- ing, engine oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the oil level. If the lamp illuminates but the oil level

is normal, stop the car and contact an au- thorised Volvo workshop.

Fault in cars emissions system Drive to an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked.

WARNING

If the warning symbols for BRAKE and ABS illuminate at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will have a tendency to slide during heavy braking.

1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 180.

ator and warning symbols

symbol: the message on the display. n. sage text is cleared using the READ

see page 44, or disappears automati- er 2 minutes.

e message text R REGULAR SERVICE is shown,

bol lamp and message text are using the READ button, or disappear ically after 2 minutes.

ult If this symbol illuminates, the system is not working. The cars regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS function.

the car in a safe place and turn off ngine. rt the engine.

warning symbol goes out, continue g. It was an indicator error. warning symbol remains illuminated, to an authorised Volvo workshop to the ABS system checked.

Fault in brake system If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may be too low.

Stop the car in a safe place and check the brake fluid reservoir

level. If the reservoir level is below MIN, the car should not be driven further. Have it towed to an authorised Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked.

If the warning symbols for BRAKE and ABS illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake force distribution sys- tem.

Stop the car in a safe place and switch off the engine. Restart the engine.

If both symbols go out, it was an indicator error.

If the warning symbols remain lit, check the brake fluid reservoir level.

If the reservoir level is below MIN, the car should not be driven further. Have it towed to an authorised Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked.

If the brake fluid level is normal and the lamps remain illuminated, drive the car carefully to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked.

02 Instruments and controls

43

Indicator and warning symbols

02

Fault in

checked

Alterna

Engine

Parking

NO

The lam hard th

SRS If a fault in the SRS system is de- tected the warning symbol will remain lit or light up while driving. Drive to an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system

.

tor not charging If this lamp illuminates while driv- ing, there is probably a fault in the electrical system. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

preheater (diesel) This lamp indicates engine pre- heating. You can start the car when the lamp switches off. Ap- plies to diesel cars only.

brake applied The lamp illuminates when the parking brake is applied. Always pull the parking brake lever to the end position.

Rear fog lamp This symbol is lit when the rear fog lamp is on.

Trailer indicator lamp Flashes when the direction indi- cators of the car and trailer are used. If the lamp does not flash, one of the direction indicator

lamps on the trailer or car is defective.

Stability systems STC/DSTC The systems different functions and symbols are described on page 126.

TE

p illuminates irrespective of how e parking brake is applied.

02 Instruments and controls

44

Infor

02

Messa sages stored in the memory by pressing the READ button.

Press the READ button to return read mes- sages to the memory.

NOTE

If a warning message interrupts when you are in the trip computer menu or wish to use the phone, you must first acknowledge the message by pressing the READ button (A).

Messa STOP S Serious risk of damage. STOP E Serious risk of damage. SERVIC p immediately. SEE M SERVIC p as soon as possible. FIX NE TIME F op. The timing is determined by the number of

rvice and engine running time. SOOT 15. STC/D m is reduced, see page 125 for more variants.

mation display

ges in the display A message appears in the display whenever a warning or indicator symbol illuminates. Once you have read and understood the message, press the READ button (A). Read messages are then erased from the display and stored in a memory. Messages regarding faults remain in the memory until the fault has been remedied.

Very serious fault messages cannot be erased from the display. They remain in the display until the fault is remedied.

Messages stored in the memory can be read again. Press the READ button (A) to see stored messages. Scroll through the mes-

ge Specification AFELY Stop the car in a safe manner and turn off the engine. NGINE Stop the car in a safe manner and turn off the engine. E URGENT Have the car checked by an authorised Volvo worksho

ANUAL Read the owners manual. E REQUIRED Have the car checked by an authorised Volvo worksho

XT SERVICE Have your car checked at the next service interval. OR REGULAR SERVICE Time for regular service at an authorised Volvo worksh

kilometres driven, number of months since the last se FILTER FULL SEE MANUAL Diesel particle filter requires regeneration, see page 1 STC SPIN CONTROL OFF The function of the stability and traction control syste

02 Instruments and controls

45

Switches in the centre console

02

Active

Hold the button depressed for at least half a second to reduce the function of the DSTC system. The LED in the button goes out and the text DSTC ANTI-SKID OFF is shown in the dis- play.

The DSTC system is reactivated when the engine is restarted. For more information, see page 126.

NO

The or

WARNING

Keep in mind that cars driving characteris- tics may change if you deactivate the DSTC system.

chassis, FOUR-C (option) Press the button to select chassis setting Comfort or Sport, see page 127. The information display shows the current setting for 10 seconds.

BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) option

Press the button to deacti- vate or reactivate the func- tion. For further information, see page 151.

DSTC system1 This button is used to re- duce or reactivate the func- tions of the DSTC system.

When the LED in the button is lit, the DSTC system is activated (assuming there is

no fault).

TE

der of the buttons may vary.

1 Option in certain markets. Only button in S60 R, others in trip computer.

02 Instruments and controls

46

Switc

02

Electric (option

socket c

The ciga in the bu ed, the b lighter to keep the not in us

Loweri the rea

Press restra

The hea ly.

Locking the boot lid (certain countries) Press this button in order to lock the boot lid. The boot lid remains locked even if the doors are unlocked manually with the master key, the master key remote control or the service key.

Deactivation of the deadlocks and detectors

Use this button if you wish to switch off the deadlock function (doors cannot be opened from the inside when locked). This button can also be used when de- activating the alarm system

movement and tilt detectors1 e.g. when transporting the car by ferry. The LED illumi- nates when the functions are deactivated.

Auxiliary lamps (accessory) Use this button if you want the auxiliary lamps of the car to light together with the main beam or to deactivate this function. The LED in the button is lit when the func- tion is active.

1 Option

hes in the centre console

socket/Cigarette lighter )

The electric socket can be used for various 12 V ac- cessories, e. g. mobile phone or a cooler box.

The ignition key must be at least in position I so that the

an supply power.

rette lighter is activated by pressing tton. Once the lighter has been heat- utton pops out again. Pull out the use it. For safety reasons, always cover in place when the socket is e. Maximum current tap 10 A.

ng the outer head restraints in r seat (option)

Do not lower the head re- straints if there is a passen- ger in one of the outer seats.

Turn the ignition key to position I or II.

the button to tilt the rear head ints forward for a better rear view. d restraints are moved back manual-

The head restraints must be in their upright positions if the rear backrests are to be fold- ed down.

Retractable power door mirrors (option)

This button is used to fold in the door mirrors if they are folded out or to fold them out if they are folded in.

Proceed as follows if a door mirror has been accidentally folded in or out:

Manually fold the door mirror forward as far as possible.

Turn the ignition key to position II. Fold the door mirror inward and then

outward using the button. The door mirrors have now returned to their original fixed positions.

Parking assistance (option) The system is always acti- vated when the car is start- ed. Press the button to de- activate/reactivate parking assistance. See also page 128.

02 Instruments and controls

47

Switches in the centre console

02

Active

vated/ac LED in t tion is a

Shifting hand tr Hold the seconds the head

The mes SETT. F SETT. F play. Fo headlam headlam

Hazard warning flashers

Use the hazard warning flashers (all direction indicators flash) when the car is stopped where it could be a traffic hazard or obstruc- tion. Press the button to activate the func- tion.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the use of hazard warning flashers vary from country to country.

Bi-Xenon Lights, ABL (option) The ABL headlamps head- lamp pattern follows the movements of the steering wheel during driving. The function is activated auto- matically when the car is started and can be deacti-

tivated by pressing the button. The he button illuminates when the func- ctivated.

headlamp pattern for right/left- affic button depressed for at least five . The car must be stationary when lamp pattern is shifted.

sage DIPPED BEAM . RIGHT TRAFFIC or DIPPED BEAM . LEFT TRAFFIC is shown in the dis- r more information and adapting p pattern for halogen or Bi-Xenon ps, see page 144.

Active chassis, FOUR-C (S60 R)

Press one of the buttons to select Comfort, Sport or Advanced mode. For further infor- mation, see page 127.

02 Instruments and controls

48

Switc

02

Door m defrost

cally dis

hes in the centre console

irror and rear window ers

Heating is used to quickly remove mist- ing and ice from the rear window and door mirrors.

Press the switch to start defrosting the rear window and door mirrors. The LED in the switch illuminates.

Defrosting is automati- connected after about 12 minutes.

Heated front seats See page 72 or page 75 for further in- formation.

02 Instruments and controls

49

Lighting panel

02

Headla

Automa countri Dipped the ignit cept wh centre p

Turn the ignition key to position II. Turn the headlamp control (1) to one of the

end positions. Roll the control (3) up or down respective-

ly to raise or lower beam alignment. Cars with Active Bi-Xenon and Bi-Xenon headlamps1 have automatic headlamp level- ling, so there is no control (3).

Instrument lighting The instrument lighting is switched on when the ignition key is in position II and the head- lamp control (1) is in one of the end positions. The lighting is automatically dimmed during the day and can be controlled manually at night.

Roll the control up or down (5) for brighter or dimmer lighting.

Positi

1 Option.

mps

tic dipped beam (certain es) beam comes on automatically when ion key is turned to position II, ex- en the headlamp control (1) is in the osition. If necessary the automatic

dipped beam can be deactivated by an au- thorised Volvo workshop.

Automatic dipped beam, main beam Turn the ignition key to position II. Dipped beam is activated by means of

turning the headlamp control (1) clockwise to the end position.

Main beam is activated by means of mov- ing the left-hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and releasing it, see page 51.

The lamps are switched off automatically when the ignition key is turned to position I or 0.

Position/parking lamps Position/parking lamps can be switched on irrespective of ignition key position.

Turn the headlamp control (1) to the centre position.

When the ignition key is in position II the po- sition/parking lamps and number plate light- ing are always on.

Headlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical align- ment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by ad- justing the height of the beam.

on Specification

Automatic/deactivated dipped beam. Only main beam flash. Position/parking lamps

Automatic dipped beam. Main beam and main beam flash work in this position.

02 Instruments and controls

50

Light

02

Fog lam

2 Fron The fron along w lamps/p

Press The ligh the fron

4 Rea The rear with the

Press The rear combine the butt lamp is

NO

Regula countr

ing panel

p

t fog lamps (option) t fog lamps can be switched on ith the headlamps or the position arking lamps.

the button (2). t in the button (2) illuminates when t fog lamps are switched on.

r fog lamp fog lamp can only be switched on headlamps or the front fog lamps.

the button (4). fog lamp indicator symbol on the d instrument panel and the light in

on (4) illuminate when the rear fog switched on.

Active Bi-Xenon Lights, ABL (option)

The ABL headlamps headlamp pattern fol- lows the movements of the steering wheel during driving. The function is activated auto- matically when the car is started and can be deactivated/activated using the button in the centre console, see page 47.

TE

tions for use of fog lamps vary from y to country.

02 Instruments and controls

51

Left-hand stalk switch

02

Stalk s

1. Shor 2. Con

indic 3. Main 4. Swit

hom

Main beam flash Move the stalk switch gently towards the

steering wheel to position (3). Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released.

Home safe lighting Some exterior lights can be kept lit and serve as home safe lighting after the car has been locked. The standard delay is 30 seconds1, but can be changed to 60 or 90 seconds.

Remove the key from the ignition switch. Move the stalk switch towards the steer-

ing wheel to the end position (4) and re- lease.

Get out of the car and lock the door.

1 Factory settings.

witch positions

t flash sequence, direction indicators tinuous flash sequence, direction ators beam flash ching, main and dipped beam, and e safe lighting

Direction indicators

Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to end

position (2). The stalk switch remains in its end position and is moved back manually, or automatical- ly by steering wheel movement.

Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to

position (1) and release, the stalk switch then returns to its home position, or move the stalk switch to position (2) and move it directly back to the home position.

The direction indicators flash three times.

Short flash sequence interrupted immediate- ly if indicating is started in the opposite direc- tion.

Switching, main and dipped beam The ignition key must be in position II for main beam to be switched on.

Turn the headlamp control clockwise to the end position, see page 49.

Move the stalk switch towards the steer- ing wheel to the end position (4) and re- lease.

02 Instruments and controls

52

Trip c

02

Trip co

Contro To scrol turn the ward or turn to t

Functio The trip formatio

AVER

Average The average fuel consumption since the last reset (RESET). The average fuel consump- tion is stored when the ignition is switched off and remains until the function is reset. Re- set using the RESET button (C).

Kilometres to empty tank The range to empty is calculated based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km. When the range to empty is shorter than 20 km then «—-» is shown in the display.

NO

If a wa are usi must b pressin the trip

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven heater is used.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if fuel consumption is changed due to a change in driving style or if a fuel-driven heater is used for example.

omputer

mputer (option)

ls l through trip computer information, thumbwheel (B) in steps, either up- downward. Continue turning to re- he starting point.

ns computer displays the following in- n:

AGE SPEED

SPEED IN MILES PER HOUR1

INSTANTANEOUS AVERAGE KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK STC/DSTC, see page 126

Average speed The average speed since the last reset (RESET). When the ignition is switched off, the average speed is stored and used as the basis of the new value when you continue driving. This can be reset with the RESET button (C) on the stalk switch.

Speed in miles per hour1

Current speed is displayed in mph.

Instantaneous Continuous information on current fuel con- sumption, calculated each second. The fig- ure in the display is updated every couple of seconds. When the car is stationary, «—-» is shown in the display.

TE

rning message interrupts while you ng the trip computer, this message e acknowledged. Acknowledge by g the READ button (A) and revert to computer function.

1 Certain countries.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven heater is used.

02 Instruments and controls

53

Right-hand stalk switch

02

Windsc

Windsc

Single

Intermi

crease w

screen wiper stalk switch must be in position 0.

To activate the rain sensor:

press the button (2). An LED in the button il- luminates to indicate that the rain sensor is active.

To turn the rain sensor off, either:

press the button (2) or

press the stalk switch downward to another wiper programme.

If the stalk switch is raised, the rain sensor will remain active, the wipers make an extra sweep and

then return to rain sensor mode when the stalk is released to position 0.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the key is removed from the ignition switch or five minutes after the ignition is switched off.

IMPORTANT

In an automatic car wash <: Turn off the rain sensor by pressing the but- ton (2) while the ignition key is in position I or II. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers may start and be damaged.

reen wipers

reen wipers off The windscreen wipers are off when the stalk switch is in position 0.

sweep Raise the stalk switch to make a single sweep.

ttent wiping You can adjust and set a suitable speed for intermittent wiping. Rotate the ring clockwise to in-

iper stroke frequency. Rotate the

ring (1) anticlockwise to decrease wiper stroke frequency.

Continuous wiping The wipers sweep at normal speed.

The wipers sweep at high speed.

Rain sensor (option) The rain sensor automatically activates the windscreen wipers based on how much wa- ter it detects on the windscreen. The sensitiv- ity of the rain sensor can be adjusted using the ring (1).

Turn the ring clockwise to increase sensitivity or anticlockwise to decrease sensitivity, (there is an extra swipe when the ring is turned clockwise.)

On/Off When activating the rain sensor, the ignition key must be in position I or II and the wind-

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.

02 Instruments and controls

54

Righ

02

Windsc Pull the activate

Headla market Use of t activate

High-pr a large q the head wash cy When te latest w are agai first win switch t windscr

t-hand stalk switch

reen washer lever towards the steering wheel to the windscreen washer.

mp washers (option certain s) he windscreen washer automatically s the headlamp washer.

essure headlamp washing consumes uantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, lamps are only washed every fifth cle (within a ten minute period). n minutes have elapsed following the indscreen washing, the headlamps n washed with high-pressure with the dscreen washing. Turn the stalk oward the steering wheel to wash the een only.

Reduced washing If only approx. one litre of washer fluid re- mains in the reservoir, the supply to the headlamps is cut off in order to prioritise cleaning of the windscreen.

Windscreen washer and headlamp washer (S60 R) Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers.

02 Instruments and controls

55

Cruise control (option)

02

Activat

The con of the st

Settin Press

show Touc

CRUI strum

Cruise c below 3

Temporary disengagement Press 0 to disengage the cruise control tem- porarily. CRUISE will be shown on the com- bined instrument panel. The speed set earlier is stored in the memory.

The cruise control is also temporarily disen- gaged when:

the brake pedal or clutch pedal is de- pressed

speed falls below 2530 km/h when trav- elling uphill1

the gear selector is moved to position N wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs a temporary increase in speed lasts longer

than one minute.

Return to the set speed Press this button to resume the previously set speed. CRUISE-ON appears on the combined instrument panel.

Disengaging Press CRUISE to disengage the cruise con- trol. CRUISE-ON goes out on the combined instrument panel.

1 Depending on engine type

ing

trols for cruise control are to the left eering wheel.

g the desired speed: the CRUISE button. CRUISE is n on the combined instrument panel. h + or to lock the vehicle speed. SE-ON appears on the combined in- ent panel. ontrol cannot be engaged at speeds 0 km/h or above 200 km/h.

Increasing or decreasing speed

Increase or decrease the speed by press- ing and holding + or . The speed of the car when the button is released is set as the new speed.

A brief press (less than half a second) on + or changes the speed by 1 km/h.

NOTE

A temporary increase in speed (less than one minute) using the accelerator, such as while overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting. When you release the accel- erator, the car will return to the pro- grammed speed.

02 Instruments and controls

56

Stee

02

Steerin

The stee height a Press

side o Then

posit Press

the st the st the c

If the vehicle rolls, the parking brake lever must be pulled more firmly.

When parking a vehicle always put the gear selector in position 1 (for manual transmission) or P (for automatic transmis- sion).

Parking on a hill If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels away from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill, turn the wheels towards the kerb.

How to release the parking brake Press the foot brake down firmly. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly,

press the button, release the parking brake lever and release the button.

W

Adjust never w that th

ring wheel adjustment, parking brake

g wheel adjustment

ring wheel can be adjusted for both nd reach. down the control on the left-hand f the steering column.

adjust the steering wheel to the ion that suits you best. the control back into place to lock eering wheel. If this is difficult, press eering wheel slightly while pressing ontrol back.

Parking brake (handbrake)

The lever is located between the front seats.

How to apply the parking brake Press the foot brake down firmly. Pull up the parking brake lever up firmly to

its full extent. Release the foot brake and make sure that

the car is stationary.

ARNING

the steering wheel before driving off, hile driving. Before driving, check

e steering wheel is fixed in position.

NOTE

The warning lamp symbol in the combined instrument panel comes on irrespective of how hard the parking brake is applied.

02 Instruments and controls

57

lectrical socket, cigarette lighter

02

Electric

The elec sories, s cooler, a mum cu

The igni for the s

W

For rea cover i

E

al socket in rear seat

trical socket can be used for acces- uch as a mobile phone charger or a nd it is designed for 12 V. The maxi- rrent is 10 A.

tion key must be at least in position I ocket to supply power.

Cigarette lighter (option) Press in the lighter to activate it. The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils.

ARNING

sons of safety, always keep the n place when the socket is not in use.

02 Instruments and controls

58

Powe

02

Operat

The pow controls be in po to opera when th moved, opened

To open Depr

To clos Raise

window will then open or close automati- cally. If the window is obstructed by an object, the movement will stop.

W

Make s gers ca closing the rea the dri closed

WARNING

The function that interrupts the movement of the windows in the event of blocking works only with automatic closing, not with manual.

WARNING

If there are children in the car: Remember to switch off the supply to the power windows by removing the ignition key if the driver leaves the car. Make sure that children and other passen- gers cannot be trapped in any way when closing the windows.

r windows

ing

er windows are operated using the in the doors. The ignition key must sition I and II for the power windows te. The windows continue to work e car is stopped and ignition key re- provided none of the doors is . Operate the windows with caution.

a window: ess the front of the control.

e a window: the front of the control.

Drivers door

Controls, power windows. A. Front B. Rear.

The driver can operate all power windows from the drivers seat.

The windows can be opened and closed in two ways:

Manual operation Depress one of the controls (A) or (B) gen-

tly or raise it gently. The power window opens or closes as long as the switch is actuated.

Automatic operation Fully depress one of the controls (A) or (B)

or raise it fully, then release. The side

ARNING

ure that children and other passen- nnot be trapped in any way when the windows. Pay close attention if r door windows are controlled from vers door or if the windows are with the remote control.

02 Instruments and controls

59

Power windows

02

Blockin doors

Blocking safety lo

The rear ing the s panel.

The lig The rear from the

Front passenger seat

Front passenger seat

The control in the front passenger door oper- ates that window only.

1 Option.

g power windows in the rear

rear power windows and electric child cks1.

power windows can be blocked us- witch on the drivers door control

ht in the switch is illuminated door windows can only be operated drivers door.

The light in the switch is extinguished The rear door windows can be operated both with the controls on each rear door and with the controls on the drivers door.

NOTE

If the car has electric child safety locks on the rear doors, the light indicates that these are also activated. The doors then cannot be opened from the inside. A text message is shown on the display when the electric child safety locks are activated.

02 Instruments and controls

60

Powe

02

Rear p

The rear the cont switch o

If the lig power w in the dr dows ca door.

The win in the sa doors.

r windows

ower windows

door windows can be operated with rol on each rear door or with the n the drivers door.

ht in the switch for blocking the rear indows (located in the control panel ivers door) is lit, the rear door win- n only be operated from the drivers

dows in the rear doors are operated me way as the windows in the front

02 Instruments and controls

61

Rearview and door mirrors

02

Interio

Bright li the rearv dimming hind.

Dimmin A. Norm

B. Dimm

Rearview mirror with compass (option in certain markets)

The upper left-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing.

Eight different directions are shown with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

If the compass is activated then it starts au- tomatically in ignition position II or when the engine is running.

r rearview mirror

ght from behind could be reflected in iew mirror and dazzle the driver. Use when disturbed by light from be-

g al position

ed position.

Automatic dimming (option) Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror.

NOTE

The control is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming.

02 Instruments and controls

62

Rear

02

Switch t button s straighte ton is co the mirr

Set the

The eart The corr compas

Ignitio Press

the m until Z pape the c

view and door mirrors

he compass on or off by pressing the et into the rear of the mirror. Use a ned paper clip for example. The but- untersunk approximately 2.5 cm in

or.

correct zone for the compass

h is divided into 15 magnetic zones. ect zone must be selected for the s to function correctly.

n position II. and hold the button on the rear of irror for approximately 3 seconds ONE is shown (use a straightened

r clip for example). The number for urrent area is shown.

Press the button several times until the number for the required geographic area (1 15) is shown. After several seconds the display returns to show the compass di- rection, this means that the change of zone is complete.

02 Instruments and controls

63

Rearview and door mirrors

02

Magnetic

Calibra The com correctl power c ventilati avoid ha jects clo

from the display, which is when calibration is complete.

Alternative calibration method Drive off as usual. CAL disappears from the display when calibration is complete.

zones for the compass

tion pass may need calibrating to display

y. For best results, switch off all major onsumers such as interior lighting, on fan, heated rear window etc. and ving metal objects and magnetic ob- se to the mirror.

Stop the car in a wide open area with the engine running.

Press and hold the button on the rear of the mirror (use a paper clip for example) until CAL is shown (approx. 6 seconds).

Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 8 km/h until CAL disappears

02 Instruments and controls

64

Rear

02

Door m

The con rors are rest.

Press mirro The li

Adjus centr

Press goes

Water and dirt-repellent coating (option) The front windows and/or door mirrors are treated with a coating that ensures that the view through the windows or in the mirrors is good even if it is raining.

Side windows and mirrors treated with the water and dirt-repellent coating are marked with a small sym- bol. For information on glass care, see page 169.

Rearview and door mirrors In certain weather conditions, the function of the dirt-repellent coating is improved if the door mirror defrosters are used, see page 73 or 75.

Defrost the door mirrors:

if they are covered with ice or snow. in heavy rain and dirty road conditions. if they are misted.

W

Adjust

NOTE

Do not use a scraper to remove ice from the mirrors as this could scratch the glass and the water and dirt-repellent coating could be damaged.

view and door mirrors

irrors

trols for adjusting the two door mir- at the front of the drivers door arm-

the L button for the left-hand door r or R for the right-hand door mirror. ght in the button illuminates. t the position with the joystick in the e. the L or R button again. The lamp

out.

Door mirrors with memory function (option) If the car has door mirrors with memory func- tion, they work together with the memory setting of the seat, see page 83.

Memory function in remote control When you unlock the car with one of the re- mote controls and change the setting of the door mirrors, these new settings are saved in the remote control. The next time you unlock the car with the same remote control and open the drivers door within five minutes, the mirrors will assume their stored positions.

Laminated side windows (option) The laminated windows in the front and rear doors improve sound insulation in the pas- senger compartment and provide better pro- tection against unauthorised entry.

ARNING

the mirrors before you begin driving.

WARNING

The driver-side door mirror is wide angled to provide optimal vision. Objects may ap- pear further away than they actually are.

02 Instruments and controls

65

Power sunroof (option)

02

Open p

The sun panel. T sitions: Venti Slidin

ward The igni

liding position

utomatic operation Pull the control past the point of resistance (3) to the rear end position (4) or past the point of resistance (2) to the forward end position (1) and release. The sunroof opens/closes completely.

order to open from comfort position to aximum opening:

Pull the control to the rear once more to the end position (4) and release. anual operation

o open:

Pull the control rearward to the point of resistance (3). The sunroof moves toward the fully open position as long as the button is held in this position.

o close:

Press the control forward to the point of resistance (2). The sunroof moves toward the closed position as long as the button is held in this position.

1 In com pletely wind no

W

If there Switch by rem leaves

WARNING

The sunroofs pinch-protection function only operates during automatic closing, not manual.

ositions

roof controls are located in the roof he sunroof can be opened to two po-

lation position, up at the rear edge g/comfort position1, backwards/for- s tion key must be in position I or II.

1. Closing, automatic 2. Closing, manual 3. Opening, manual 4. Opening, automatic 5. Opening, ventilation position 6. Closing, ventilation position

Ventilation position

To open: Press the rear edge of the control (5) up-

ward. To close: Pull the rear edge of the control (6) down-

ward. Switch from ventilation position to comfort position; pull the control rearwards to its end position (4) and release.

S

A

In m

M T

T

fort position, the sunroof is not com- open in order to reduce the level of ise.

ARNING

are children in the car: off the supply to the power sunroof oving the ignition key if the driver the car.

1 2 3 4

5

6

02 Instruments and controls

66

Powe

02

Sunscr

The sun or sunsc tomatica the hand close it.

Pinch p The sun activate If blocke ically op

r sunroof (option)

een

roof features a manual, sliding interi- reen. The sunscreen slides back au- lly when the sunroof is opened. Grip le and slide the screen forwards to

rotection roofs pinch protection function is d if the hatch is blocked by an object. d, the sunroof will stop and automat- en to the previous position.

WARNING

The sunroofs pinch protection function only operates during automatic closing, not during manual closing. Make sure childrens hands are clear when closing the sunroof.

02 Instruments and controls

67

02

68

General information on climate control …………………………………………….70 Manual climate control, AC …………………………………………………………….72 Electronic climate control, ECC (option) ………………………………………….. 74 Air distribution ………………………………………………………………………………77 Fuel-driven heater (option) ……………………………………………………………..78

03 Climate control

70

Gene

03

Air con The clim and deh ger com either m trol (ECC

Misting Reduce on the in regular w

Particl Make su replaced Volvo w

Ice and Remove trol syst bonnet

sunroof (if fitted). Also, make sure the air ducts in the parcel shelf are not blocked.

Acceleration The air conditioning system switches off temporarily at full acceleration. You may feel a temporary rise in temperature.

Condensation In warm weather, condensation from the air conditioning system may drip under the car. This is normal.

Fuel economy With ECC, the air conditioning system is con- trolled automatically and is used just enough to cool the passenger compartment and de- humidify the incoming air. This provides bet- ter fuel economy compared to conventional systems where the air conditioning cools the air to just above freezing point.

NO

The air but to passen window be on.

ral information on climate control

ditioning ate control system cools or heats, umidifies the air entering the passen- partment. The car is equipped with anual (AC) or electronic climate con- ).

windows the problem of windows misting up side by cleaning the windows. Use a indow cleaner.

e filter re that the multifilter/particle filter is regularly. Consult an authorised

orkshop.

snow ice and snow from the climate con- em air intake (the grille between the and the windscreen).

Fault tracing and repair Entrust fault tracing and repair of the climate control system to an authorised Volvo work- shop only.

Refrigerant The air conditioning system contains R134a refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo- rine, which means that it is harmless to the ozone layer. The system must only be charged with R134a refrigerant. Have an au- thorised Volvo workshop carry out this work.

Cars with ECC

Actual temperature The temperature you select corresponds to the physical experience with reference to air speed, humidity, exposure to sun, etc. which affect the interior and exterior of the car.

Sensors The sun sensor is on the upper portion of the dashboard. Remember not to cover it. Do not cover the passenger compartment tempera- ture sensor on the climate control panel.

Side windows and sunroof To ensure that the air conditioning works sat- isfactorily, close all side windows and the

TE

conditioning can be switched off, ensure the best possible air in the ger compartment and prevent the s from misting, it should always

03 Climate control

71

al information on climate control

03

Air dist

Incomin different

Panel vents in the door pillars

A. Open

B. Closed

C. Lateral airflow

D. Vertical airflow.

Aim the vents toward the rear side win- dows to remove misting.

Aim the vents inwards in the car for a comfortable climate in the rear seat.

Bear in mind that small children can be sensi- tive to airflow and draughts.

Gener

ribution

g air is distributed through several vents located throughout the car.

Panel vents in the dashboard

A. Open

B. Closed

C. Lateral airflow

D. Vertical airflow

Aim the outer vents towards the side win- dows to remove misting from the front side windows.

Cold weather: Close the centre vents for op- timum comfort and best demisting.

03 Climate control

72

Manu

03

Contro

1. AC 2. Rec 3. Air d 4. Rea 5. Hea 6. Hea 7. Hea 8. Fan You mu sition to

Use the as well (

Heating/Cooling left/right-hand side Turn to set how warm or cold the incoming air shall be. For cooler air, the air conditioning must be en- gaged.

Heated front seats Proceed as follows for heated front seat(s):

1

al climate control, AC

l panel

ON/OFF irculation istribution

r window and door mirror defroster ted front seats ting/Cooling right-hand side ting/Cooling left-hand side

st turn the fan knob (8) from the 0 po- engage the air conditioning.

air conditioning at low temperatures 015 C) to dehumidify incoming air.

AC ON/OFF ON : Air conditioning is on. It is controlled by the sys- tems AUTO function. This way, incoming air is cooled and dehumidified.

OFF : Off.

When the defroster function is activated the air conditioning is automatically switched on (can be switched off with the A/C button).

2 3 4

7 6

5

8

03 Climate control

73

Manual climate control, AC

03

Press switc

Press switc

Press no LE

An auth tempera

Fan

Rear w defrost

function

Air distribution Use the air distribution con- trol positions (marked with dots) between the different symbols to fine-tune air dis- tribution for maximum com- fort.

Defroster The defroster on the air dis- tribution control is used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side windows. Air flows to

the windows at high speed.

When the function is selected the following also takes place to provide maximum dehu- midification of the air in the passenger com- partment:

the air conditioning (AC) is automatically engaged (can be switched off with the A/C button)

recirculation is automatically disengaged. When the defroster is switched off, the cli- mate control returns to the previous settings.

once: High heat both LEDs in the h light up. twice: Low heat one LED in the h lights up. three times: Heating switched off Ds in the switch light up.

orised Volvo workshop can adjust the ture.

Fan speed can be in- creased or decreased by turning the knob. If the knob is set to 0 then the air conditioning is not en- gaged.

indow and door mirror ers

Use this button to quickly remove misting and ice from the rear window and door mirrors, see page 47 for fur- ther information about this

.

Recirculation Recirculation can be used to shut out bad air, ex- haust, etc. from the passen- ger compartment. The air in the passenger compartment

is then recirculated, i.e. no air from outside the car is taken into the car when this func- tion is activated. Recirculation (together with the air conditioning system) cools the pas- senger compartment more quickly in a warm climate.

If you allow the air in the car to recirculate, there is a risk of icing and misting, especially in winter. The timer function minimises the risk of ice, misting and bad air.

Activate the function as follows:

Press for more than 3 seconds. The LED flashes for 5 seconds. The air recirculates in the car for 312 minutes depending on the outside temperature.

The timer function is activated each time you press .

To switch off the timer function:

Press again for more than 3 seconds. The LED illuminates for 5 seconds to confirm your selection.

03 Climate control

74

Elect

03

Contro

1. AC 2. Rec 3. Rec 4. AUT 5. Air d 6. Pass

sens 7. Defr

wind 8. Rea 9. Seat 10.Seat 11.Tem

settings are switched off when AUTO is pressed.

Temperature The two knobs can be used to set the temperature for the passenger and drivers sides of the car. Remember that the car does not heat up or cool down any more

quickly even if you select a higher or lower temperature than you want in the passenger compartment.

1

13

ronic climate control, ECC (option)

l panel

On/Off irculation/Multifilter with sensor irculation O istribution enger compartment temperature or oster, windscreen and side ows

r window and door mirror defroster heater right-hand side heater left-hand side perature right-hand side

12.Temperature left-hand side 13.Fan

AUTO The AUTO function automatically regulates climate control so that the selected temperature is attained. The automatic

function controls heating, air conditioning, air quality sensor, fan speed, recirculation, and air distribution. If you select one or more functions manually, the other functions continue operating automatically. All manual

2 3 64 5

9

7 8

9

12

10

11

03 Climate control

75

nic climate control, ECC (option)

03

Fan

ously se

Rear w defrost

about th

Defrost window

When the defroster function is activated the air conditioning is automatically switched on (can be switched off with the A/C button).

Heated front seats Proceed as follows for heated front seat(s):

Press once: High heat both LEDs in the switch light up.

Press twice: Low heat one LED in the switch lights up.

Press three times: Heating switched off no LEDs in the switch light up.

An authorised Volvo workshop can adjust the temperature.

NO

If the k that th with an ditionin

Electro

Fan speed can be increased or decreased by turning the knob. If AUTO is selected, fan speed is controlled automatically. The previ-

t fan speed is disconnected.

indow and door mirror ers

Use this button to quickly remove misting and ice from the rear window and door mirrors, see page 48 for further information

is function.

er, windscreen and side s

Used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side win- dows. Air flows to the win- dows at high speed. The

LED in the defroster button illuminates when this function is engaged.

When the function is selected, the following also takes place to provide maximum dehu- midification of the air in the passenger com- partment:

the air conditioning (AC) is automatically engaged (can be switched off with the A/C button)

recirculation is automatically disengaged. When the defroster is switched off the climate control returns to the previous set- tings.

Air distribution Air to windows Air to head and body Air to legs and feet Press AUTO to return to automatic air distribu- tion.

AC ON/OFF ON : Air conditioning is on. It is controlled by the sys- tems AUTO function. This way, incoming air is cooled and dehumidified.

OFF : Off.

TE

nob for the fan has been turned so far e left LED above the knob lights up orange light, the fan and the air con- g system are switched off.

03 Climate control

76

Elect

03

Recircu

If you al there is in winte

The time air quali minimis air.

Activate

Press The L recirc depe

The t you p

To switc

Press The LED your sel

Keep the following in mind:

Make it a rule to have the air quality sensor activated at all times.

Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting.

If misting occurs, you should deactivate the air quality sensor.

If misting occurs, you can use the defrost- er functions for the windscreen, side win- dows and rear window, see page 75.

Follow the Volvo service programme for the recommended replacement interval of the Multifilter. If the car is used in environments where more contaminants are present, it may be necessary to change the Multifilter more often.

ronic climate control, ECC (option)

lation Recirculation can be used to shut out bad air, ex- haust, etc. from the passen- ger compartment. The air in the passenger compartment is then recirculated, i.e. no air from outside the car is taken into the car when this function is activated.

low the air in the car to recirculate, a risk of icing and misting, especially r.

r function (cars with Multifilter and ty sensor have no timer function) es the risk for ice, misting and bad

the function as follows:

for more than 3 seconds. ED flashes for 5 seconds. The air ulates in the car for 312 minutes nding on the outside temperature. imer function is activated each time ress . h off the timer function:

again for more than 3 seconds. illuminates for 5 seconds to confirm

ection.

Air quality system (option) The air quality system con- sists of a multifilter and a sensor. The filter separates gases and particles, there- by reducing the volume of

odours and pollutants entering the passen- ger compartment. When the sensor detects contaminated outside air, the air intake is closed and the air in the passenger compart- ment is recirculated.

When the air quality sensor is active, the

green AUT LED illuminates in .

Operation

Press to activate the air quality sensor (normal setting).

Or:

Select one of the following three functions by pressing repeatedly.

The AUT LED illuminates. The air quality sensor is now activated.

No LED illuminates. Recirculation is not activated unless needed to cool in a warm climate.

The LED MAN lights. Recirculation is now activated.

03 Climate control

77

Air distribution

03

stribution Use:

loor. There is a amount of airflow

panel vents and the ter vents for the reen and side s.

When you want to warm your feet.

loor and panel In sunny weather with cool outside tempera- tures.

Air distribution Use: Air di

Air through front and rear panel vents.

When you want good cooling in a warm climate.

Air to f certain to the defros windsc window

Air to windows. Air is not recirculated in this position. Air conditioning is always engaged. There is a certain amount of airflow to the panel vents.

When you want to remove ice and misting. High fan speed is good for this.

Air to f vents.

Air to both floor and windows. There is a certain amount of airflow to the panel vents.

When you want comfortable conditions and good demisting in a cold climate. Not too low a fan speed.

03 Climate control

78

Fuel-

03

Genera

The elec before t gramme

This is m

press activa turnin The par ately or ing TIME to the tim ready.

The car heating side tem exceeds

Warning decal on fuel filler flap.

Parking on a hill If you park your car on a steep incline, the front of the car should be facing up the slope to ensure the supply of fuel to the parking heater.

Car clock/timer For safety reasons, all timer settings will be cleared if the car clock is reset after timer settings have been made.

driven heater (option)

l

trical system must be «awakened» he parking heater can be pro- d.

ost easily done by:

ing the READ button or ting main beam or g on the ignition.

king heater can be started immedi- set with two different start times us- R 1 and TIMER 2. Start time refers e the car should be heated and

s electronic system calculates when should be started based on the out- perature. If the outside temperature 25 C, the heater does not switch

on. At temperatures of 10 C and below, the maximum running time of the parking heater is 60 minutes.

If the parking heater does not start despite repeated attempts, a message is shown in the display. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

Messages in the display Once the settings for TIMER 1, TIMER 2 and Direct Start are activated, the amber warn- ing symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates and explanatory text is shown in the display.

When you leave the car, you will receive a message regarding the current settings of the system.

WARNING

The car must be outdoors when the parking heater is used. Switch off the parking heater before refuel- ling. Spilled fuel could be ignited. Check in the information display that the parking heater is off. (When the additional heater is running, PARK HEAT ON is shown in the display.)

03 Climate control

79

Fuel-driven heater (option)

03

Setting For reas gramme several

Use t Briefl

the h Use t Briefl

minu Use t Briefl

your Press

timer After se Settings TIMER 1

Deactiv heater Proce

the p elaps

Press Use t

TIME

If this is the case, a message will appear in the display. Acknowledge the message using the READ button (A).

Additional heater (diesel)1

Extra heat from the additional heater may be required in cold weather to reach the correct temperature in the passenger compartment.

The additional heater starts automatically when extra heat is required if the engine is running. It is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off.

IMPORTANT

Repeated use of the parking heater com- bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting. If the parking heater is used regularly, the car must be driven for the same time as the parking heater is used in order to ensure that the alternator has time to charge the battery.

1 Certain countries

TIMER 1 and 2 ons of safety, you can only pro- times for the following 24 hours, not days in a row.

he ring (B) to toggle to TIMER 1. y press the RESET button (C) so that ours setting starts to flash. he ring (B) to set the desired hours. y press the RESET button so that the tes setting starts to flash. he ring (B) to set the desired minutes. y press the RESET button to confirm setting. the RESET button to activate the . tting TIMER 1, toggle to TIMER 2. are made the same way as for .

ating timer-started parking

ed as follows to manually switch off arking heater before the set time has ed: the READ button (A). he ring (B) to toggle to PARK HEAT R 1 (or 2). The text ON flashes.

Press the RESET button (C). The text OFF is shown with a constant glow and the parking heater is switched off.

Direct start of the parking heater Use the ring (B) to toggle to DIRECT

START. Press the RESET button (C) to make the

ON and OFF options available. Select ON. The parking heater will now run for 60 minutes. Heating of the passenger com- partment will begin as soon as the engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera- ture.

Deactivating direct-started parking heater Use the ring (B) to toggle to DIRECT

START. Press the RESET button (C) to make the

ON and OFF options available. Select OFF.

Battery and fuel If the battery is not sufficiently charged or the petrol tank is close to empty, the parking heater will be switched off.

80

Front seats …………………………………………………………………………………..82 Interior lighting ……………………………………………………………………………..84 Storage spaces in the passenger compartment ……………………………….86 Rear seat ……………………………………………………………………………………..90 Cargo area ……………………………………………………………………………………92

04 Interior

82

Fron

04

Seating

The driv justed to sitions.

1. Forw just th peda chan

2. Raise pump

3. Raise 4. Lumb

Floor mats (option) Volvo supplies floor mats especially pro- duced for your car.

1 The con tain uph

2 Also ap

WARNING

The floor mat at the drivers seat must be firmly fitted and secured in the attachment clips to prevent it from being trapped around and under the pedals.

t seats

position

ers and passenger seats can be ad- the optimum sitting and driving po-

ard/backward: lift the handle to ad- e distance to the steering wheel and

ls. Check that the seat is locked after ging position. /lower front edge of seat cushion: up/down1. /lower seat: pump up/down ar support2, turn the wheel.

5. Backrest rake: turn the wheel. 6. Control panel for power seat.

Lowering the front seat backrest (option)

The passenger seat backrest can be folded forward to make room for long loads.

Move the seat as far back as possible. Adjust the backrest to an upright position

90 degrees. Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest

while folding it forwards. Slide the seat forward so that the head

restraint is «locked in place» under the glovebox.

trol panel (2) is not available with cer- olstery alternatives.

plies to power seat.

WARNING

Adjust the position of the drivers seat be- fore setting off, never while driving. Check that the seat is locked in position.

04 Interior

83

Front seats

04

Power

The sea after un trol with nition sw when th

Power 1. Front 2. Seat 3. Seat 4. Back Overloa blocked and wai

Key memory in remote control key The drivers seat positions are stored in the key memory when the car has been locked with the remote control key. When the car is unlocked with the same remote control key the drivers seat and rearview mirrors adopt the stored positions when the drivers door is opened.

Emergency stop If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one of the buttons to stop the function.

NOTE

The key memory is independent of the seat memory.

WARNING

Risk of crushing. Make sure that children do not play with the controls. Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment. Ensure that none of the rear seat passen- gers can be trapped.

seat (option)

ts can be adjusted for a certain time locking the door with the remote con- out the key being inserted into the ig- itch. The seats can always be set

e ignition is on.

seat (option) edge of seat cushion up/down forward/rearward up/down rest rake d protection is deployed if any seat is . If this occurs, switch off the ignition t a short time before operating the

seat again. Only one of the seats motors can be used at a time.

Seat with memory function (option)

Buttons for memory function

Store setting Adjust seat. Press and hold button MEM while press-

ing button 1, 2 or 3 at the same time.

Using a stored setting Press one of the memory buttons 1 3 until the seat stops. If you release the button then the movement of the seat will stop.

04 Interior

84

Inter

04

Readin

Passeng lamps.

1. Read 2. Interi 3. Read The fron off using

The inte with a s

Automatic lighting All reading lamps and interior lighting are switched off automatically after 10 minutes from when the engine is switched off. Each type of lighting can be switched off manually before this.

The interior lighting is switched on automati- cally1 and remains on for 30 seconds when: the car is unlocked from the outside using

the key or remote control the engine is switched off and the key is

turned to the 0 position. The interior lighting is switched on and re- mains on for 10 minutes when: one of the doors is open if the interior

lighting is not switched off. The interior lighting is switched off when: the engine is started when the car is locked from the outside

using the key or remote control. Automatic lighting can be disengaged by pressing and holding button (2) for more than 3 seconds. A short press on the button re- engages automatic lighting.

The programmed times, 30 seconds and 10 minutes, can be changed by a Volvo workshop. 1 The function is light-dependent and is only

activated when it is dark.

ior lighting

g lamps and interior lighting

er compartment lighting and reading

ing lamp left-hand front or lighting ing lamp right-hand front t reading lamps are switched on and button (1) or (3).

rior lighting is switched on and off hort press on button (2).

Rear reading lamps

4. Reading lamp left-hand rear 5. Reading lamp right-hand rear The rear reading lamps are switched on and off using button (4) or (5).

04 Interior

85

Interior lighting

04

Vanity

The ligh cover is

1 Option

mirror1

t illuminates automatically when the lifted.

in certain markets.

ge spaces in the passenger compartment

04 Interior

87

in the passenger compartment

04

Storag

1. Sung (optio

2. Stora 3. Ticke 4. Cup 5. Glove 6. Stora

sole. 7. Com 8. Cup 9. Stora

Rear storage compartment cup holder for rear seat passengers

To access the storage compartment/privacy handset, press the button on the left-hand side of the armrest and fold the tunnel com- partment cover back.

To use the cup holder, press the button on the right-hand side of the armrest and fold the upper part of the tunnel compartment cover back. The cup holder and cover can be closed separately.

W

Ensure lie or p cause Always a seatb

Storage spaces

e spaces

lasses compartment, drivers side n) ge pocket. t clip.

holder (option) box. ge compartment in the centre con-

partment in door panel. holder in the armrest, rear seat. ge pocket.

Storage compartment in centre console

1. Rear storage compartment The rear storage compartment of the centre console can be used to store CDs and the like. This storage compartment can be equipped with privacy handset + holder (option)

2. Front storage compartment (roller cover) This storage compartment can be equipped with the following options: Cup holder (option) Ashtray (option)

3. 12 V socket 4. Ashtray (option)

ARNING

that no hard, sharp or heavy objects rotrude in such a way that they could injury during heavy braking. secure large and heavy objects with elt or cargo retaining straps.

04 Interior

88

Stora

04

Cup ho compa

Dashboard cup holder (option)

Press the holder to open. Press the holder in after use.

NOTE

Never use glass bottles. Remember also that hot drinks may cause burns.

ge spaces in the passenger compartment

lder in front storage rtment (option)

The cup holder can be easily removed:

Press the cup holder forwards (1), while lifting it at the rear edge (2).

Push the cup holder back (3), into the cut- out, under the roller cover.

Angle the front edge (4) of the cup holder up and lift out.

Repeat the procedure in reverse order to refit the cup holder.

04 Interior

89

s in the passenger compartment

04

Gloveb

The glov such as petrol ca

Bottle holder for rear seat passengers (option)

Proceed as follows to use the bottle holder:

Open the holder. Insert the bottle. The bottle holder can also serve as a waste bin. Insert a bag into the holder and fold it over the edges.

NOTE

The bin does not require special bags. Use a regular plastic bag.

Storage space

ox

ebox can be used to store things the owners manual, maps, pens and rds.

Coat hanger

The coat hanger is only intended for light gar- ments.

04 Interior

90

Rear

04

Cup ho (option

seat

lder in armrest, rear seat ).

Head restraints in the rear seat

Adjusting the vertical position of the head restraint.

The centre seat head restraint can be adjust- ed vertically to suit the height of the passen- ger. Raise the head restraint as needed. The release button on one of the supports must be pressed to push the head restraint down. See the illustration!

04 Interior

91

Rear seat

04

Loweri

Both rea ward, to easier to

Fold the

First not b

Pull t in the

Fold

WARNING

Always secure the load. During heavy brak- ing the load may otherwise shift, causing personal injury. Cover sharp edges with something soft. Turn off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long ob- jects! You may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load and cause a gear to engage and the car to move off.

ng the rear seat backrest

r seat backrests can be tipped for- gether or individually. This makes it transport long objects.

rear seat backrests as follows:

check that the head restraints have een lowered. he handle in the cargo area as shown illustration. the backrest forward.

A hatch in the right-hand rear backrest allows you to transport long objects such as skis and planks. Open the hatch as follows:

Fold the left-hand backrest and centre armrest forwards. See page 91.

Release the hatch by pushing the catch upward while folding the hatch forward.

Tip the backrest back into position with the hatch open.

04 Interior

92

Carg

04

Hatch f

Use the

Integra The cov hinge. T the ski h

Carrier bag holder (option)

Open the hatch in the cargo area. Hang or secure your grocery bags using the tension- ing strap.

General Payload depends on the cars total kerb weight, including any accessories that are mounted.

Kerb weight includes the driver, the weight of the fuel tank when filled to 90% and various fluids, such as washer fluid and coolant.

Mounted accessories, i.e. towbar, load carri- ers, space box, etc., are included in the kerb weight.

NO

If the c er cush

o area

or long objects

seatbelt to secure the load.

ted booster cushion er on the armrest/child seat has no he cover must be removed before atch is used.

When removing Open the cover 30. Pull straight up.

When fitting Move the cover back in the grooves be-

hind the upholstery. Close the cover.

TE

ar is equipped with integrated boost- ion, fold this out first.

04 Interior

93

Cargo area

04

The load the num

W

The dr change heavily

capacity of the car is reduced by ber of passengers and their weight.

ARNING

iving characteristics of the car based on its kerb weight and how it is loaded.

94

Keys and remote controls ………………………………………………………………96 Locking and unlocking …………………………………………………………………..99 Child safety locks ……………………………………………………………………….. 103 Alarm (option) …………………………………………………………………………….. 104

05 Locks and alarm

96

Keys

05

Keys

Ignition keys and electronic immobiliser The ignition key must not hang with other keys or metal objects on the same key ring. The electronic immobiliser could be activated erroneously and the car will not start.

NOTE

The master key blade (1) must be fully ex- tended (as illustrated) when starting the car. Otherwise there is a risk that the immobilis- er function will prevent the car from starting.

and remote controls

1. Master key This key opens all locks.

2. Service key1 This key is for the front door, ignition switch and steering wheel lock only.

Your car is delivered with two master keys and one service key1. One of the master keys is collapsible and equipped with an integrat- ed remote control.

Loss of key If you should lose one of your keys, bring the remaining keys to an authorised Volvo work- shop. As a crime prevention measure, the code for the lost key is erased from the sys- tem and the other keys must be re-coded in the system.

The key blades unique code is available at authorised Volvo workshops, who can order new key blades.

A maximum of six remote controls/key blades can be programmed and used for one single car.

Immobiliser The keys are equipped with coded chips. This code must match the reader in the igni- tion switch. The car can only be started if the correct key with the correct code is used.

2

1

1 certain markets only.

05 Locks and alarm

97

Keys and remote controls

05

Remot

Unlock Press th the boo

Boot lid Press th lid only.

Panic a The pan tract att

Folding/opening key The key can be folded by pressing button (6) while folding the key blade into the keypad.

The folding key will open automatically with one press of the button. 6

e control functions

ing e button (1) once to unlock all doors, t lid and the fuel filler flap.

e button (2) twice to unlock the boot

larm function ic alarm function can be used to at- ention in an emergency.

Press and hold the red button (3) for at least three seconds or press it twice during the same time to activate the direction indicators and the horn.

The panic alarm is deactivated automatically after 25 seconds or by pressing any of the buttons on the remote control.

Approach lighting Do the following when you approach the car:

Press the yellow button (4) on the remote control.

The interior lighting, position/parking lamps, number plate lighting and door mirror lamps (option) will switch on. These lamps will re- main lit for 30, 60 or 90 seconds. An author- ised Volvo workshop can select a suitable time setting.

To extinguish the approach lighting:

Press the yellow button again.

Locking Lock all doors, boot lid and fuel filler flap with button 5.

There is a delay of approx. 10 minutes for the fuel filler flap.

3

2

5

1

4

05 Locks and alarm

98

Keys

05

Chang

Replace the lock signals a tance.

Remo the re

Repla with t ing th with y

Refit is pro preve

and remote controls

ing the remote control battery

the battery after repeated failure by s to respond when remote control re transmitted within a normal dis-

ve the cover by carefully prising up ar edge of with a small screwdriver. ce the battery (type CR 2032, 3 V) he plus side facing up. Avoid touch- e battery and its contact surfaces our fingers.

the cover. Make sure the rubber seal perly fitted and free from damage to nt water from entering.

Turn the old battery in to your Volvo workshop so that it can be disposed of in an environmentally friendly manner.

05 Locks and alarm

99

Locking and unlocking

05

Lockin outside

The mas locks all neously side han

The fuel car is un for 10 m

The car boot lid there is

Automatic locking

Automatic locking is activated and reactivat- ed from the control panel in the drivers door.

The function operates by locking the doors automatically when the speed of the car ex- ceeds 7 km/h. They remain locked until a door is opened from the inside or when all doors are unlocked from the control panel.

Activating/deactivating automatic locking The ignition key must be in position I or II. Press the READ button in the left-hand

stalk switch to acknowledge any messag- es in the information display.

1 Applies

g/unlocking the car from

ter key or remote control locks/un- side doors and the boot lid simulta- . The side door lock buttons and in- dles are disengaged.1

filler flap can be opened when the locked. The flap remains unlocked inutes after the car has been locked.

can be locked1 even if a door or the is open. When the door is closed a risk that the keys will be locked in.

Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened within two minutes of unlocking, all are locked again automatically. This function prevents the car from being left unlocked un- intentionally. For cars with alarms, see page 104.

to certain markets

05 Locks and alarm

100

Lock

05

Press lockin tus is

The mes car is al AUTOLO shown i

Unlocking/locking the boot lid with the remote control Proceed as follows in order to unlock the boot lid only:

Press twice on the remote control button to open the boot lid. The boot lid is unlocked and opened slightly at the same time.

If all doors are locked when the boot lid clos- es, it locks automatically.

ing and unlocking

and hold the button for central g until a new message for lock sta-

shown in the information display. sages AUTOLOCK ACTIVATED (the

so locked when it moves) and CK DEACTIVATED respectively are

n the information display.

Locking and unlocking the car from the inside

All the doors and the boot lid can be locked or unlocked simultaneously using the control panel in the drivers door (or passenger door).

All doors can be locked using the lock button on the control panel by each respective door.

If the car is not locked from the outside then it can be unlocked by opening the door with the handle.1

1 Applies to certain markets

05 Locks and alarm

101

Locking and unlocking

05

Unlock key

The mas ing the b only, e.g tion or t boot lid

Inser lower

Twist off.

Unloc

To deactivate service locking Turn the master key to position II and

press the button again.

ing the boot lid with the master

ter key should be used when unlock- oot lid manually during emergencies . if the remote control does not func-

he car is without power. Open the as follows:

t the master key into the upper or section of the lid covering the lock. up or down in order to prise the lid

k the boot lid.

Service locking, boot lid (certain countries)

This function is beneficial if the car is left for service, with a hotel parking valet or the like. The service key is left with the staff, who can open and drive the car but do not have ac- cess to the boot lid (or the glovebox if it is locked with the master key).

To activate service locking Turn the master key to position II. Press the button. An LED in the button

lights when the function is activated and a message is shown in the display.

05 Locks and alarm

102

Lock

05

Lockin The glov ing the m

Temporary deactivation of the deadlocks and any detectors

If others prefer to remain seated in the car with the doors locked from the outside e.g. during transport by ferry it is possible to de- activate the deadlocks.

Insert the key into the ignition switch, turn it to position II and then back to position I or 0.

Press the button. If the car is equipped with an alarm, move- ment and tilt detectors are also deactivated. See page 105.

ing and unlocking

g the glovebox ebox can only be locked/opened us- aster key not with the service key.

Deadlocks1 Your car has a special deadlock function, which means that the doors cannot be opened from the inside if they are locked.

Deadlocks can only be activated from the outside by the drivers door being locked with the key or remote control. All doors must be closed before deadlocks can be activat- ed. Once activated, the doors cannot be opened from the inside. The car can only be unlocked from the outside via the drivers door or by using the remote control.

Deadlocks are engaged after a 25 second delay once the doors have been closed.

1 Certain countries

05 Locks and alarm

103

Child safety locks

05

The LED is locked messag the key sensors ignition

Child safety lock controls right-hand rear door.

A. Child-safe position the doors cannot be opened from inside; turn outwards.

B. Not child-safe position the doors can be opened from inside; turn inwards.

W

Do not withou

WARNING

Remember that in the event of an accident, rear seat passengers cannot open the rear doors from the inside if the child safety locks are activated. Therefore, keep the doors unlocked while driving. In the event of an accident, rescue personnel will then be able to enter the car from the outside.

in the button illuminates until the car with the key or remote control. A

e is shown in the display as long as remains in the ignition switch. The will be reactivated the next time the is switched on.

Mechanical child safety locks rear doors

Control for child safety lock left-hand rear door.

The controls for the child safety locks are in the rear edge of each rear door and are only accessible when the door is open. Use a flat metal object, such as a screwdriver, to turn the control and thus activate or deactivate the child safety lock.

ARNING

allow anyone to remain in the car t first deactivating the deadlock.

05 Locks and alarm

104

Alarm

05

The ala

When th tors all a

the b the b a side the ig

appro move

comp optio

the c senso only)

a bat anyo

Automatic alarm activation If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened within two minutes of the alarm being dis- armed, and the car was unlocked with the re- mote control, the car re-arms the alarm auto- matically. The car locks at the same time. This function prevents you from accidentally leaving the car without the alarm on.

In certain countries (e.g. Belgium, Israel) the alarm is reactivated after a certain delay if the drivers door was opened and closed but the car was not re-locked.

Deactivating a triggered alarm Press the UNLOCK button on the remote control if the alarm sounds and you wish to deactivate it. Two short flashes of the direc- tion indicators signal confirmation.

Audio signal Alarm The audio signal is given from a siren with a reserve battery. Each alarm signal lasts 25 seconds.

Visual signal Alarm When the alarm is triggered, all direction indi- cators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is deactivated as described earlier.

(option)

rm system

e alarm is armed, it continually moni- larm inputs. The alarm is triggered if:

onnet is opened oot lid is opened door is opened nition switch is turned with a non- ved key or subjected to force ment is detected in the passenger artment (if a motion sensor is fitted

n for certain markets only) ar is raised or towed away (if a tilt r is fitted option for certain markets

tery cable is disconnected. ne tries to disconnect the siren.

Activating the alarm Press the LOCK button on the remote con- trol. A long flash signal from the direction in- dicators of the car confirms that the alarm is armed and all doors are closed. In certain markets, the key or the control in the drivers door can be used to arm the alarm.

Deactivating the alarm Press the UNLOCK button on the remote control. Two short flashes from the cars di- rection indicators confirm that the alarm has been deactivated.

If the remote control batteries are discharged then the alarm can be disarmed by turning the key to ignition position II.

IMPORTANT

The alarm is fully armed when the cars di- rection indicators have made one long flash and the LED on the dashboard flashes once every other second.

05 Locks and alarm

105

Alarm (option)

05

Tempo and de

To avoid for exam during a detecto

1. Inser to po or 0.

2. Press The LED car with

A messa long as

rary deactivation of detectors adlocks

inadvertently triggering of the alarm, ple when leaving a dog in the car or

ferry crossing, the movement and tilt rs can be temporarily deactivated:

t the key in the ignition switch, turn it sition II and then back to position I

the button. in the button lights until you lock the the key or remote control.

ge will be shown in the display as the key remains in the ignition switch.

The sensors will be reactivated when the ig- nition is restarted.

If your car has deadlocks, they are reactivat- ed at the same time. See page 102.

Indicator lamp on the dashboard (certain countries) An indicator lamp (LED) at the top of the dashboard indicates alarm status:

Lamp not lit: Alarm is deactivated. The lamp flashes once every other second

after the cars direction indicators have made one long flash signal: Alarm is armed.

Lamp flashes quickly, after deactivating the alarm and until the ignition is switched on: The alarm has been triggered.

If there is a fault in the alarm system, a mes- sage appears in the display.

If the alarm system does not function cor- rectly, have an authorised Volvo workshop examine the car.

IMPORTANT

Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm system components. All such attempts can affect terms of insurance.

05 Locks and alarm

106

Alarm

05

Testing

Testing motion Open Activ

confi Wait Test

seng simila will n

Deac with t

Testing Arm t Wait Unloc

blade Open

will s Repe Deac

with t

(option)

the alarm system

the passenger compartment sensor: all the windows. ate the alarm. Alarm activation is rmed with a slow flash of the LED. 30 seconds. the movement detector in the pas- er compartment by lifting a bag or r from the seat cushion. The alarm

ow sound and flash. tivate the alarm by unlocking the car he remote control.

the doors he alarm. 30 seconds. k the drivers door with the key . one of the doors. The alarm system ound and flash. at the test for the other doors. tivate the alarm by unlocking the car he remote control.

Testing the bonnet Get into the car and deactivate the move-

ment detector. Arm the alarm (remain in the car and lock

the doors with the button on the remote control).

Wait 30 seconds. Open the bonnet with the handle under

the dashboard. The alarm will now sound and flash.

Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control.

Testing the boot lid: Arm the alarm. Wait 30 seconds. Unlock with the key on the drivers side

without opening any of the doors. Open the boot lid with the handle. The

alarm will now sound and flash. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car

with the remote control.

05 Locks and alarm

107

05

108

General ……………………………………………………………………………………… 110 Refuelling ………………………………………………………………………………….. 113 Starting the car ………………………………………………………………………….. 115 Manual gearbox …………………………………………………………………………. 118 Automatic gearbox ……………………………………………………………………… 119 Brake system …………………………………………………………………………….. 123 Stability and traction control system …………………………………………….. 125 Active chassis FOUR-C …………………………………………………………….. 127 Parking assistance ……………………………………………………………………… 128 Towing and recovery …………………………………………………………………… 130 Start assistance …………………………………………………………………………. 132 Driving with a trailer …………………………………………………………………… 133 Towing equipment ………………………………………………………………………. 135 Detachable towbar ……………………………………………………………………… 137 Load on the roof …………………………………………………………………………. 142 Adjusting headlamp pattern ………………………………………………………… 144 BLIS (Blind Spot Information System) option ……………………………….. 149

06 Starting and driving

110

Gene

06

Econom Econom tly with ing style

Keep in

Drive as so let th load

A col warm

Avoid engin temp

Drive celer

Do no loads

Do no are c

Remo use.

Do no

Your new car slippery road surfaces Driving on a slippery road may feel different depending on whether you choose a car with a manual or an automatic gearbox. Practice skid driving under controlled conditions so that you know how your new car reacts.

ral

ical driving ical driving results from driving gen-

anticipation and adapting your driv- and speed to the situation.

mind the following:

the engine to operating temperature on as possible! That is to say: do not e engine idle, but drive with a light as soon as you can. d engine consumes more fuel than a one. driving short distances where the e never has time to reach operating erature. gently! Avoid unnecessary quick ac- ations and heavy braking. t drive with unnecessary, heavy in the car. t use winter tyres when the roads

lear and dry. ve the load carrier when it is not in

t open side windows unnecessarily.

Do not drive with an open boot lid! If you drive with the boot lid open, some of the exhaust gases and poisonous carbon monoxide could be sucked into the car through the cargo area. If you must drive a short distance with the boot lid open, pro- ceed as follows:

Close all windows. Distribute the air between the windscreen

and floor while running the fan at high speed.

06 Starting and driving

111

General

06

Driving The car maximu speed o exercise water.

When d and do n been pa and che achieve make th layed br

Do not overload the battery The electrical functions in the car load the battery to varying degrees. Avoid having the ignition key in position II when the engine is turned off. Use position I instead, as less power is used. The 12 volt outlet in the cargo area supplies power even when the ignition key is removed.

Examples of functions that use a lot of power:

ventilation fan windscreen wipers audio system parking lights. Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use func- tions which use a lot of power when the en- gine is switched off.

A text is shown in the display in the com- bined instrument panel if battery voltage is low and remains until the engine has started.

The energy-saving function shuts down cer- tain functions or reduces the load on the bat- tery by, for example, slowing the ventilation fan and switching off the audio system.

Charge the battery by starting the engine.

IM

Engine the air In grea missio of the o these s

NO

Clean engine ter driv

in water can be driven through water at a m depth of 25 cm at a maximum f 10 km/h. Extra caution should be d when passing through flowing

riving in water, maintain a low speed ot stop the car. When the water has

ssed, depress the brake pedal lightly ck that full brake function is d. Water and mud for example can e brake linings wet resulting in de- ake function.

PORTANT

damage can occur if water enters filter. ter depths, water can enter the trans- n. This reduces the lubricating ability ils and shortens the service life of ystems.

TE

the electric contacts of the electric block heater and trailer coupling af- ing in water and mud.

IMPORTANT

Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time. This could cause electrical malfunctions. In the event of stalling in water, do not try to restart. Tow the car out of the water.

06 Starting and driving

112

Gene

06

Do not system Under c hilly terr in warm and coo

To avoi system Drive

up a Switc Avoid Do no

stop, Remo

of the temp

To avoi Do not e (diesel e trailer or perature

ral

allow the engine and cooling to overheat ertain conditions, e.g. when driving in ain and with a heavy load, especially weather, there is a risk of the engine ling system overheating.

d overheating in the cooling : at low speeds if driving with a trailer long incline. h off the air conditioning temporarily. letting the engine idle. t turn the engine off immediately you

if the car has been driven hard. ve any auxiliary lamps from in front grille if driving in extreme high eratures.

d the engine overheating: xceed engine speeds of 4500 rpm ngine: 3500 rpm) if driving with a caravan in hilly terrain. The oil tem- can become too high.

06 Starting and driving

113

Refuelling

06

Openin

The fuel right-han of the fu

The fuel car is un

Refuelling with petrol Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out.

Refuelling with diesel At low temperatures (5 C till 40 C), a par- affin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which can lead to ignition problems. Make sure you use a special winter grade fuel during cold periods.

NO

The fill utes af

NOTE

Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather. Do not add cleaning additives unless spe- cifically recommended by a Volvo work- shop.

IMPORTANT

Petrol-powered cars must always be refu- elled with unleaded petrol so as not to dam- age the catalytic converter.

g the fuel filler flap

cap is inside the fuel filler flap on the d rear wing and hangs up on the inside

el filler flap.

filler flap can be opened when the locked.

Fuel filler flap High outside temperatures can cause some overpressure in the tank. Open the cap slowly.

TE

er flap remains unlocked for ten min- ter the car has been locked.

NOTE

After refuelling, replace the fuel cap and turn until one or more clicks is heard.

WARNING

Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling the ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.

06 Starting and driving

114

Refu

06

Emerg flap

The fuel when ne normally

There is hand pa sert you lock lo rear edg plunger

W

There a move y

elling

ency opening of the fuel filler

filler flap can be opened manually cessary if it cannot be opened .

a detachable hatch on the right- nel of the cargo area. Undo this, in- r hand and locate the flaps electrical cation is approximately inside the e of the fuel filler flap. Pull the lock straight back.

ARNING

re sharp edges behind the panel so our hands slowly and carefully.

06 Starting and driving

115

Starting the car

06

Before

Apply

Automa Gear

Manua Shift the clutch p larly imp

iesel particle filter (DPF) iesel cars are equipped with a particle filter, hich results in more efficient emission con-

rol. The particles in the exhaust gases are ollected in the filter during normal driving. o-called «regeneration» is started in order to urn away the particles and empty the filter. his requires the engine to have reached nor- al operating temperature.

egeneration of the filter takes place auto- atically at an interval of approximately

00-900 km depending on driving condi- ions. Regeneration normally takes between 0 and 20 minutes. During this time fuel con- umption may increase slightly.

egeneration in cold weather f the car is frequently driven short distances n cold weather then the engine does not each normal operating temperature. This eans that regeneration of the diesel particle

ilter does not take place and the filter is not mptied.

hen the filter has become approximately 0 % full of particles, a yellow warning trian- le illuminates on the dashboard, and the essage, SOOT FILTER FULL SEE MANUAL

s shown on the dashboard display.

W

Never steerin being t wise b steer th The ign the car

NO

The idl than no cold st system ature a es exh environ The ma ed (as the car mobilis starting

starting the engine

the parking brake.

tic gearbox selector in position P or N.

l gearbox gear lever into neutral and hold the edal fully depressed. This is particu- ortant in very cold conditions.

Starting the engine

Petrol Turn the ignition key to the start position. If the engine does not start within 5-10 seconds, release the key and repeat the start attempt.

Diesel Turn the ignition key to the drive position. An indicator symbol in the combined instru- ment panel illuminates to show that engine preheating is underway.

Turn the ignition key to the start position when the indicator symbol goes out.

D D w t c S b T m

R m 3 t 1 s

R I i r m f e

W 8 g m i

ARNING

remove the ignition key from the g lock while driving or when the car is owed. The steering lock could other- e activated, making it impossible to e car. ition key must be in position II when is being towed.

TE

ing speed can be noticeably higher rmal for certain engine types during

arting. This is so that the emissions can reach normal operating temper- s quickly as possible, which minimis- aust emissions and protects the ment. ster key blade must be fully extend-

illustrated on page 96) when starting . Otherwise there is a risk that the im- er function will prevent the car from .

06 Starting and driving

116

Start

06

Start reg car until tempera motorw approxi generat reduced

When re messag

Use the weather operatin

IM

If the fi functio the eng will hav

ing the car

eneration of the filter by driving the the engine reaches normal operating ture, preferably on a main road or

ay. The car should then be driven for mately 20 minutes more. When re- ion is underway the engine power is .

generation is complete the warning e is cleared automatically.

parking heater (option) in cold so that the engine reaches normal g temperature more quickly.

Ignition keys and electronic immobiliser The ignition key must not hang with other keys or metal objects on the same key ring. The electronic immobiliser could otherwise be activated accidentally. If this happens, remove the excess keys and restart the car.

Never rev the engine hard straight after a cold start! If the engine does not start or mis- fires, contact a Volvo workshop.

PORTANT

lter fills up it may be incapable of ning. Then it can be difficult to start ine and there is a risk that the filter e to be replaced.

WARNING

Never remove the ignition key from the steering wheel lock while driving or when the car is being towed! Never switch off the ignition (key to position 0) or remove the ig- nition key while the car is in motion. The steering wheel lock could be activated, making the car impossible to steer.

06 Starting and driving

117

Starting the car

06

Ignition

key is ha turned in the stee

switch and steering lock

0 Locked position The steering wheel locks when the ignition key is re- moved.

I Radio position Certain electrical compo- nents can be switched on. The engines electrical sys- tem is not activated.

II Driving position The key position when driv- ing. The cars entire electri- cal system is connected.

III Start position Starter motor. The starter motor is connected. Re- lease the key once the en- gine has started. The key automatically springs back to the driving position. If the

rd to turn, the front wheels may be such a way that there is tension in

ring wheel lock. In which case, turn

the wheel back and forth to make it easier to turn the key.

Ensuring that the steering wheel is locked when you leave the car minimises the risk of theft.

Speed related power steering1

If the car is equipped with speed related power steering this means that it is easier to steer at low speeds, which in turn facilitates parking etc.

As speed is increased the steering force is adapted to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.

1 Option

06 Starting and driving

118

Manu

06

Gear p

Depress change. pedal be propriat

For the highest

Gear positions, six-speed

Depress the clutch pedal fully with each gear change. Remove your foot from the clutch pedal between gear changes. Follow the ap- propriate shifting pattern.

For the best possible fuel economy, use the highest gear possible as often as possible.

al gearbox

ositions, five-speed

the clutch pedal fully with each gear Remove your foot from the clutch tween gear changes. Follow the ap-

e shifting pattern.

best possible fuel economy, use the gear possible as often as possible.

Reverse gear inhibitor

Only engage reverse gear when the car is stationary.

To put the car in reverse, the gear lever must first be moved to neutral (between 3rd and 4th gear). Thus, reverse cannot be di- rectly selected from 5th gear due to the re- verse gear inhibitor.

06 Starting and driving

119

Automatic gearbox

06

Cold st When st changes due to t perature gearbox engine i

Turbo e When th shifts ge catalytic ing temp haust em

Adapti The gea as an ad ally mon and sen change

Lock-u The gea gears), w lower fu

Mechanical gear selector inhibitor

The gear selector can be moved freely be- tween N and D. Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector.

Press the inhibitor button to move the lever forward or back between the different gear positions.

art arting in low temperatures, the gear can sometimes feel hard. This is

he gearbox oils viscosity at low tem- s. To minimise engine emissions, the shifts up later than normal when the s started at low temperatures.

ngine e engine is cold, the transmission ars at higher revs. This allows the converter to reach normal operat- erature more quickly, with less ex- issions.

ve system rbox is controlled by what is known aptive system. The system continu- itors how the gearbox is behaving ses every gear change for optimum quality.

p function rs have a lock-up function (locked hich gives better engine braking and

el consumption.

Safety systems Cars with an automatic gearbox have special safety systems:

Keylock To remove the ignition key, the gear selector must be in the P position. The key is locked in all other positions.

Parking position (P) Stationary car with engine running:

Hold your foot on the brake pedal when moving the gear selector to another posi- tion.

Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking position (P position) To be able to move the gear selector from the P position to other gear positions, the ignition key must be in position I or II and the brake pedal must be depressed.

Neutral position (N position) The brake pedal must be depressed to move the gear selector from position N to other gear positions when the ignition key is in position I or II.

06 Starting and driving

120

Auto

06

Manua

P Par Select th the engi

The car select P

In P the ways ap the car.

R Rev The car select R

when driving with a trailer to increase engine braking.

L Low gear Select L if you wish to drive in 1st or 2nd. Position L gives the best engine braking for mountain driving, etc.

matic gearbox

l positions

k is position when you wish to start

ne or park the car.

should be stationary when you !

gearbox is mechanically locked. Al- ply the parking brake when parking

erse should be stationary when you .

N Neutral N is the neutral position. No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake when the car is stationary with the gear selector in position N.

D Drive D is the normal driving position. The car au- tomatically shifts between the different gears of the gearbox based on the level of acceler- ation and speed. The car should be station- ary when selecting D from position R.

4 Low gear Up and downshifts between 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th are automatic. There is no upshift to 5th gear.

Position 4 can be used:

for mountain driving when driving with a trailer to increase engine braking.

3 Low gear Up and downshifts between 1st, 2nd, and 3rd are automatic. There is no upshift to 4th gear.

Position 3 can be used:

for mountain driving

06 Starting and driving

121

Automatic gearbox

06

Geartr

The S60 instead lector. T tivated u button t

The S p teristics gears w celeratio lower ge layed up

If the gear lever is moved to (minus) the car changes down a gear and engine brakes at the same time. If the gear lever is moved to + (plus) the car changes up a gear.

1 S60 R h

onic1

R with Geartronic has an S button of a W button located at the gear se- he gearbox sports programme is ac- sing the S button. An LED is lit in the

o indicate active mode.

rogramme provides sportier charac- . It allows higher engine speed for the hile responding more quickly to ac- n. During active driving, the use of a ar is prioritised leading to a de- shift.

Manual positions, Geartronic

To move from the automatic driving position D to a manual position, move the gear selec- tor to the left. To go from position MAN to the automatic driving position D, move the selector to the right to position D.

While driving The manual gearshift mode can be selected at any time while driving. The engaged gear is locked until you choose another gear. The car will only shift down automatically if you slow down to a very slow speed.

as Geartronic as standard.

06 Starting and driving

122

Auto

06

W Wi

gramme

The win 3rd gea pery roa gaged, l kick-dow

The W p position

All-wheel drive AWD All-wheel drive is always engaged.

All-wheel drive means that all four road wheels are driven at the same time. Power is automatically distributed between front and rear wheels. An electronically controlled clutch system distributes the power to the pair of wheels that grips best. This provides the best traction and prevents wheel spin.

Under normal driving conditions, the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels.

All-wheel drive improves driving safety in rain, snow and icy conditions.

1 S60R w

matic gearbox

nter The W button1 by the gear selector engages and dis- engages the winter programme W. The symbol W is shown in the combined instrument panel when the winter pro-

is activated.

ter programme starts the gearbox in r to make it easier to pull off on slip- ds. When the programme is en- ower gears are activated only by n.

rogramme can only be selected in D.

Kick-down When the accelerator is pressed all the way to the floor, beyond the position normally re- garded as full acceleration, a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kick- down.

When maximum speed for this gear is reached, or if the accelerator is released from the kick-down position, the gearbox auto- matically changes up.

Kick-down is used when maximum accelera- tion is needed, such as for overtaking.

To prevent overrevving, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibitor.

The kick-down function 2 cannot be used in the manual positions. Return to automatic position D.

ith Geartronic has an S button instead. 2 Applies to Geartronic only.

06 Starting and driving

123

Brake system

06

Brake s

If the ca engine t pressed the engi pressed feel the the brak be more brake as

Brake

the car. and may pressure the norm

method uses engine braking more efficiently and requires the foot brake for only brief periods.

Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts an additional load on the cars brakes.

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) The ABS system (Anti-lock Braking System) is designed so that the wheels do not lock when braking. This retains the best possible steer-

ing response when braking. This improves your ability to swerve to avoid obstacles. The ABS system does not increase your total braking capacity. However, as the driver you have increased ability to steer and thus bet- ter control over the car, which in turn increas- es safety.

After the engine has started and reached a speed of about 20 km/h, a short self-test can be both heard and felt. When the ABS sys- tem functions, you can hear and feel pulses in the brake pedal. This is completely normal.

W

The br gine is

NO

If braki press t peated

ervo

r is rolling or is being towed with the urned off, the brake pedal must be about five times harder than when ne is running. If the brake pedal is when the engine is started, you will pedal drop. This is normal and due to e servo becoming active. This may noticeable if the car has emergency sistance (EBA).

circuits This symbol lights if a brake circuit is not working.

If a fault should occur in one of the circuits, it is still possible to brake

The brake pedal will travel further feel softer than normal. Harder on the pedal is needed to produce al braking effect.

Dampness can affect braking characteristics Brake components become wet when the car is driven in heavy rain, through pools of water or when the car is washed. This may alter brake pad friction characteristics so that there is a delay before braking effect is no- ticed.

Press the brake pedal lightly from time to time if driving for long stretches in rain or slushy snow, as well as after setting off in very damp or cold weather. This warms up the braking surfaces and dries off any water. It is also recommended to do this before parking the car for a long period in such weather conditions.

If the brakes are used heavily When driving in the Alps or other roads with similar characteristics, the cars brakes are heavily loaded even if the brake pedal is not being depressed especially hard.

Because speed is often low, the brakes are not cooled as effectively as when driving on flat roads at higher speed.

So as not to overload the brakes, shift down when driving downhill instead of using the foot brake. Use the same gear driving down- hill as you would use driving uphill. This

ARNING

ake servo only works when the en- running.

TE

ng with the engine switched off, he brake pedal sharply once, not re- ly.

06 Starting and driving

124

Brak

06

The AB for ap

syste if the

fault.

Emergency Brake Assistance EBA The Emergency Brake Assistance function (EBA) is integrated in the DSTC system and is designed to provide immediate maximum brake force whenever rapid braking is neces- sary. The system detects the need for heavier braking by registering how quickly the brake pedal is applied.

The EBA function is active at all speeds. For safety reasons, it cannot be switched off.

When the EBA function is activated, the brake pedal sinks while maximum braking force is applied. Continue braking without re- leasing the brake pedal. The EBA function disengages when the pressure on the brake pedal is released.

NO

You m take m tem. Do not feel the Practic suitabl tice sk

W

If the B illumin have o level in drive c Volvo w checke If the b brake f fore to The rea be inve

NOTE

When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.

e system

S symbol lights up: proximately two seconds during the m test when the car is started. ABS system has shut down due to a

Electronic brake force distribution system EBD The Electronic Brakeforce Distribution sys- tem (EBD) is an integrated part of the ABS system. The EBD system controls the brake force to the rear wheels so that the best pos- sible braking force is always available. Pulses will be heard and felt through the brake pedal when the system regulates brake force.

TE

ust depress the brake pedal fully to aximum advantage of the ABS sys-

release the pedal when you hear and ABS pulses. e braking with the ABS system at a e location such as a skid pan to prac- idding.

ARNING

RAKE and ABS warning symbols are ated at the same time, a fault may ccurred in the brake system. If the the brake fluid reservoir is normal, arefully to the nearest authorised orkshop to have the brake system d. rake fluid is under the MIN level in the luid reservoir, do not drive further be- pping up the brake fluid. son for the loss of brake fluid must stigated.

06 Starting and driving

125

bility and traction control system

06

Genera

The Dyn system tion and

A pulsin ing or ac tion. The than exp

The car depend integral

Active The func force of stabilise

Reduced operation

System operation during skidding and accel- eration can be partially deactivated.

Operation during skidding is delayed and so allows more skidding which provides greater freedom for dynamic driving.

Traction in deep snow or sand is improved as acceleration is no longer limited.

Operation Turn thumbwheel (1) until the STC/DSTC

menu is shown. DSTC ON means that the system function is unchanged.

DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF1means that system operation is reduced.

Funct

1Option

Active

Spin C

Traction

1 S60 R shows DSTC ANTI-SKID OFF.

Sta

l

amic Stability and Traction Control (STC/DSTC) improves the cars trac- helps the driver to avoid skidding.

g sound may be noticed during brak- celeration when the system is in ac- car may accelerate more slowly ected.

is equipped with either STC or DSTC ing on market. The table shows the functions of the respective systems.

Yaw Control tion limits the driving and brake

the wheels individually in order to the car.

Spin Control The function prevents the driving wheels from spinning against the road surface during acceleration.

Traction control system The function is active at low speed and trans- fers power from the driving wheel that is spinning to the one that is not.

ion/system STC DSTC1

in certain markets. Standard on S60 R.

Yaw Control X

ontrol X X

control system X X

06 Starting and driving

126

Stab

06

Press STC/

At the sa as a rem duced. T engine i

Messa TRACTI means t reduced ature.

The func when th

ANTI-SK the syst

Stop the e

The symbol illuminates and stays lit DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF is shown in the display at the same time.

Reminds that the STC/DSTC system has been reduced.

Symbol for Warning

The symbol illuminates with a constant yellow glow.

TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY OFF is shown in the display at the same time. Indicates that the system has been tem-

porarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature.

Automatic reactivation of the function takes place when the brake temperature has returned to normal.

W

Suppre driving

NO

DSTC the dis

1Not av

WARNING

Under normal driving conditions, the STC/DSTC system improves the cars road safety, but this should not be taken as a reason to increase speed. Always follow the usual precautions for safe cornering and driving on slippery road sur- faces.

ility and traction control system

and hold RESET (2) until the DSTC menu is changed. me time the symbol illuminates inder that the system has been re- he system remains reduced until the

s next started.

ges in the information display ON CONTROL TEMPORARILY OFF hat the system has been temporarily due to excessive brake disc temper-

tion is reactivated automatically e brakes have cooled.

ID SERVICE REQUIRED means that em has been disabled due to a fault.

the car in a safe place and turn off ngine.

If the message remains when the engine is restarted, drive to an authorised Volvo work- shop.

Symbols in the combined instrument panel

Symbol for STC/DSTC The symbol has different meanings depending on how it is shown.

The symbol lights and goes out again after approx. two seconds Indicates system check when the engine

is started. The symbol flashes Indicates that the system is operating. The symbol illuminates and stays lit ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED is shown in the display at the same time.

Fault indicator in STC/DSTC system:

Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.

Restart the car. If the warning symbol goes out, the fault

was temporary and it is not necessary to visit a workshop.

If the warning symbol remains lit, drive to an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked.

ARNING

ssing system function may alter the characteristics of the car.

TE

ON1 is shown for several seconds in play each time the engine is started.

ailable on S60 R.

06 Starting and driving

127

Active chassis FOUR-C

06

Active

Concep The func number the cars vertical speed a

The FOU the sens shock a 500 time tremely absorbe tions in

Chassis any time road cha driving s of millise

FOUR-C switch (S60 R)

Advanced2

In Advanced mode, shock absorber move- ments are minimal and optimised for maxi- mum traction. Acceleration response is more direct, the automatic gearbox shift schedule is sporty, and roll during cornering is mini- mised. This setting is recommended for flat, even road surfaces only.

When the ignition is switched off in Advanced setting, the chassis will resume the Sport mode when the car is re-started.

1 Option 2 Only available on S60 R.

chassis FOUR-C1

FOUR-C switch in the centre console (not S60 R)

The car is equipped with an extremely advanced active chassis system Continu- ously Controlled Chassis

t that is regulated electronically. tions of the system are based on a

of sensors that continually monitor movements and reactions, such as

and lateral acceleration, vehicle nd wheel movements.

R-C control unit analyses data from ors and performs the necessary bsorber setting adjustments up to s per second. This results in ex-

fast and accurate individual shock r control, which contributes to varia- chassis characteristics.

characteristics can be modified at while driving, when the nature of the nges or when you desire a change in tyle. This change occurs in a matter conds.

The effect produced by pressing the acceler- ator pedal is linked to your choice of chassis characteristics. (only applies to R-models).

Comfort Comfort mode adjusts the chassis setting so that the body is insulated from uneven sec- tions of the road surface, which allows for better «glide». Shock absorption is softer and body movements are minimal. This setting is recommended for long-distance driving or driving on slippery road surfaces.

When the ignition is switched off in Comfort setting, the chassis will resume the same mode when the car is re-started.

Sport In Sport mode, steering responses are quicker than in Comfort mode. Damping is harder and the body follows the road surface to minimise rolling during quick cornering. The car feels sportier.

When the ignition is switched off in Sport setting, the chassis will resume the same mode when the car is re-started.

in certain markets. Standard on S60 R.

06 Starting and driving

128

Park

06

Genera

Parking a

Parking ing. A si tected o

towbar or similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike carrier would trigger the sensors.

Rear parking assistance is deactivated auto- matically when towing a trailer if a Volvo gen- uine trailer cable is used.

Front parking assistance2

The distance covered to the front of the car is about 0.8 metres. The signal comes from the front loudspeakers.

Front parking assistance cannot be com- bined with extra lights because the sensors are affected by the extra lights.

Fault indicator If the yellow warning symbol illumi- nates and the display shows PARK ASSIST SERVICE REQUIRED then parking assistance is disengaged.

1 Depend ance sy or Acce

W

Parkin driver The se cannot and an

2 Provided that the parking assistance is mounted both front and rear.

WARNING

Some sources may deceive the system with false signals. Examples of such sources in- clude horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumat- ic brakes and motorcycle exhaust pipes. Ice and snow covering the sensors may also cause false warning signals.

ing assistance

l1

ssistance front and rear.

assistance is used as an aid to park- gnal indicates the distance to a de- bject.

Function The system is activated automatically when the car is started at which point the LED in the switch for parking assistance illuminates. The display shows the text message PARK ASSIST ACTIVE if reverse gear is engaged or if the front sensors detect an object.

Parking assistance is active at speeds below 15 km/h. The system is deactivated at higher speeds. The system is reactivated when the speed falls below 10 km/h again.

The frequency of the signal increases as you come closer to an object in front of or behind the car. If the volume of another sound source from the audio system is high, this is automatically muted.

The tone becomes constant at a distance of about 30 cm. If there are objects within this distance behind or in front of the car, the sig- nal alternates between left and right-hand speakers.

Rear parking assistance The distance covered to the rear of the car is about 1.5 m. Rear parking assistance is acti- vated when reverse gear is engaged. The sig- nal comes from the rear loudspeakers.

The system must be deactivated when re- versing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the

ing on the market, the Parking assist- stem may be either Standard, Option ssory.

ARNING

g assistance does not relinquish the s own responsibility during parking. nsors have blind spots where objects be detected. Be aware of children imals near the car.

06 Starting and driving

129

Parking assistance

06

Activat

Parking the butt switch g vated w nates.

ing/deactivating

assistance can be deactivated with on in the switch panel. The LED in the oes out. Parking assistance is reacti- ith the switch and the LED illumi-

Cleaning the sensors

Parking assistance sensors.

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to en- sure that they work properly. Clean them with water and car shampoo.

06 Starting and driving

130

Towi

06

Do not

If you bu the cata Cars wit bump st battery

If the c Unloc

car c Keep

ble sp Bear

steer engin press peda force

Drive Keep

unne

For aut The g The m

towin is 80

Long The e

(bum the n

To fit the towing eye

Towing eye, rear

A — Release the cover1 by carefully prizing in the groove with a coin for example.

B — Screw the towing eye securely into place up to the flange (C). You can use a wheel wrench.

After use, unscrew the towing eye and refit the cover.

To screw in the rear towing eye, you must first remove a plastic bolt from the bracket for the rear towing eye. Use the wheel wrench from the tool kit to unscrew the plas- tic bolt. Refit the plastic bolt after use.

1 The method of opening the cover may vary.

ng and recovery

tow the car to bump start it

mp start a car with manual gearbox, lytic converter may be damaged. h automatic gearbox cannot be arted. Use a booster battery if the

is flat.

ar must be towed k the steering wheel lock so that the

an be steered. in mind the highest legally permissi- eed.

in mind that the brake and power ing servos do not function when the e is off. Approx. five times more ure must be exerted on the brake l and steering requires much more than usual. gently. the towline taut in order to avoid cessary jerking.

omatic gearboxes ear selector should be in position N. aximum permissible speed when

g a car with automatic gearbox km/h. est permitted distance: 80 km. ngine cannot be towed to start p started). See «Jump starting» on ext page.

Towing eye, rear

Towing eye, front

The towing eye is located in the tool kit in the cargo area. You must screw the towing eye into place before towing. The sockets and covers for the towing eye are located on the right-hand side of each bumper.

06 Starting and driving

131

Towing and recovery

06

NO

The to bracke secure reason detach

Recovery The towing eye may only be used for towing on roads, not for recovery after driving into a ditch or the like. Professional help should be called for recovery.

TE

wing eye cannot be fitted in the rear t on cars with towbar. In which case, the tow rope in the towbar. For this , it is advisable to always store the able towbar in the car.

06 Starting and driving

132

Start

06

Startin

If for som discharg spare ba the engi fastened the start

To avoid mend yo

Turn Ensu If the

stop the c

Conn er ba red c comp

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect the jump leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode. The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical atten- tion immediately.

assistance

g with a donor battery

e reason the battery in your car is ed, you can «borrow» current from a ttery or another cars battery to start

ne. Always check that the clamps are properly to prevent sparking during attempt.

the risk of explosion, we recom- u do exactly as follows.

the ignition key to position 0. re that the donor battery is 12 volt. booster battery is in another car, the engine of that car and make sure ars are not touching. ect the red cable between the boost- ttery positive terminal (1+) and the onnection in the engine artment (2+).

Attach the clamp to the contact point located beneath a small black cover with a plus sign which is integrated in the fuse box cover.

Connect one clamp of the black cable to the negative terminal of the booster bat- tery (3).

Connect the other clamp of the black cable to the lifting eye on the cars engine (4).

Start the engine of the «booster car». Let the engine run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle, 1500 rpm.

Start the engine of the car with the flat battery.

Remove the clamps in reverse order.

NOTE

Do not remove the clamps during the start attempt (risk of spark build-up).

06 Starting and driving

133

Driving with a trailer

06

Genera

The tow proved. to which

Distri weigh spec

Incre spon the ty

Clean greas to pre

Do no car is least

The b usual Down spee

If the hot c overh comb red z and le

If the syste

Trailer weights See page 243 for permitted trailer weights.

1 Does no damper

NOTE

The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. Na- tional vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.

WARNING

Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the rig may be difficult to control during evasive manoeu- vres and braking.

l

ing bracket on the car must be ap- Your Volvo dealer can advise you as towing bracket to use.

bute the load on the trailer so that the t on the towing bracket follows the

ified maximum towball load. ase tyre pressure so that it corre- ds to the pressure for full load. See re pressure table! the towing bracket regularly and e the towball1 and all moving parts vent unnecessary wear. t drive with a heavy trailer when your brand new! Wait until it has driven at 1000 km. rakes are loaded much more than on long and steep downhill slopes. shift to a lower gear and adjust your

d. car is driven with a heavy load in a limate, the engine and gearbox may eat. The temperature gauge in the ined instrument panel goes into the

one when the car overheats. Stop t the engine idle a few minutes.

car overheats, the air conditioning m can be temporarily switched off.

The gearbox reacts with a built-in protec- tion function if the car overheats. See the message in the display!

The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.

For reasons of safety, you should not drive faster than 80 km/h, even if the laws of certain countries permit higher speeds.

If you park with a trailer, always set the gear selector to P (automatic gearbox) or engage a gear (manual gearbox). If you park on a steep hill, put chocks under the wheels.

Avoid driving on inclines exceeding 12 % if the trailer weight exceeds 1200 kg. Do not drive with a trailer at all on inclines exceeding 15 %.

t apply to ball hitch with vibration .

06 Starting and driving

134

Drivi

06

Driving gearbo When

brake to P. gear parki

Selec drivin slowl upsh box.

If you use a can » to dri

NO

Some autom er. Che to wha rofitted

ng with a trailer

with trailer automatic x parking on hills, apply the parking before moving the gear selector When starting on a hill, first put the selector in drive and then release the ng brake. t a low gear in the gearbox when g on steep inclines or when driving y. This prevents the gearbox from ifting if you have an automatic gear- The gearbox oil will be cooler. have a Geartronic gearbox, do not higher manual gear than the engine handle». It is not always economical ve in high gears.

Levelling

If your car is equipped with automatic level- ling, the rear suspension always retains the correct ride height regardless of load. When the car is stationary, the rear suspension sinks. This is completely normal. When start- ing with a load, the level is pumped up after a certain distance.

TE

models require an oil cooler for the atic gearbox when driving with a trail- ck with your nearest Volvo dealer as t applies to your car if you have a ret- towbar.

06 Starting and driving

135

Towing equipment

06

Towbar

The tow regularly damper the towb

If the ca bar, the be follow

W

Be sur the cor

W

If the c towbar Follow towbal The tow key be Check green.

NO

Always use. Ke

s

ball must be cleaned and greased . If a towball hitch with vibration

is used, it is not necessary to grease all.

r is equipped with a detachable tow- towball mounting instructions must

ed carefully, see page 137.

Trailer cable

An adapter is required if the cars towbar has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.

ARNING

e to attach the trailers safety cable to rect place.

ARNING

ar is fitted with a Volvo detachable : the assembly instructions for the l section carefully. ball section must be locked with the

fore setting off. that the indicator window shows

TE

remove the towball section after ep it in the cargo area.

06 Starting and driving

136

Towi

06

Specifi

Dimens

Fixed t

Fixed t

Detach

Detach

ng equipment

cations

ions for mounting points (mm)

A B C D E F G

owbar standard 1058

83

1083 542 122 50

305 owbar with Nivomat 91

able towbar standard 1069

94 316

able towbar with Nivomat 100

1 Side member

2 Ball centre

06 Starting and driving

137

Detachable towbar

06

Fitting

Remo Check that the indicator window (3) shows red. If the window does not show red, press in (1) and turn the locking wheel anticlockwise (2) until you hear a click.

the towball

ve the guard plug. Ensure that the mechanism is in the un- locked position by turning the key clock- wise.

06 Starting and driving

138

Deta

06

Inser click.

Turn the key anticlockwise to the locked position. Remove the key from the lock.

chable towbar

t the towball section until you hear a Check that the indicator window shows green.

06 Starting and driving

139

Detachable towbar

06

NO

Check pulling section remov the pre

TE

that the towball section is secure by it up, down and back. If the towball is not fitted correctly then it must be

ed and refitted in accordance with vious steps.

NOTE

The trailers safety cable must be attached to the attachment on the towbar.

06 Starting and driving

140

Deta

06

Remov

Inser unloc

Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while pulling the towball rearward and upward.

chable towbar

ing the towball

t the key and turn it clockwise to the ked position.

Push in the locking wheel (1) and turn it anticlockwise (2) until you hear a click.

06 Starting and driving

141

Detachable towbar

06

Inser

06 Starting and driving

142

Load

06

Genera

The load sories m load car combine The load the num For info page 24

Keep in mind that the cars wind resist- ance and fuel consumption increase in proportion to the size of the load.

Drive gently. Avoid quick accelerations, heavy braking and taking curves hard.

Remove the load carrier when it is not in use. This reduces wind resistance and fuel consumption.

W

The ca pendin the loa

WARNING

Load no more than 100 kg on the roof, in- cluding the load carriers and any space box. The cars centre of gravity and driving char- acteristics are altered by roof loads.

on the roof

l

capacity is affected by extra acces- ounted on the car, such as a towbar, riers, space box, the passengers d weight etc. as well as towball load. capacity of the car is reduced by ber of passengers and their weight. rmation on permitted weights, see 3.

Using load carriers (accessory)

To avoid damaging your car and to achieve the best level of safety when driving, we rec- ommend that you only use load carriers that Volvo has specially designed for your car.

Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.

Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Do not load lopsidedly. Place the heaviest items at the bottom.

Remember that the cars centre of gravity and driving characteristics change if you have a load on the roof.

ARNING

rs driving characteristics change de- g on how heavily it is loaded and how d is distributed.

06 Starting and driving

143

Load on the roof

06

Fitting

Make right deca

Fit th Caref

side t Screw Press

and c unde

Screw Fit th

into t Screw

load carriers

sure the load carrier is fitted in the direction (see the marking on the l under the cover). e guide pins into the guide holes (1). ully lower the bracket on the other o the roof. the knob up a bit.

the knob against the roof bracket atch the hook in the roof bracket r the roof rail.

the load carrier in place. e guide pins of the other brackets he guide holes.

the load carrier in place.

Check that the hook is properly secured in the roof bracket.

Tighten the knobs alternately until the car- rier feels secure.

Replace the cover. Check that the roof rack is properly se-

cured.

NOTE

Check the knobs regularly to see that they are properly tightened.

06 Starting and driving

144

Adju

06

Correc hand tr

A. Headl B. Headl

So as no headlam masking beam pa

Headla Copy th to a self as opaq

The mas the head referenc

sting headlamp pattern

t light pattern for right or left- affic

amp pattern for left-hand traffic. amp pattern for right-hand traffic.

t to dazzle oncoming drivers, the p beam pattern can be altered by the headlamps. The quality of the ttern may not be as good.

mp masking e templates and transfer the pattern -adhesive, waterproof material such ue tape or the like.

k is positioned using the dot (5) in lamp lens as a reference point. The e measurement (X) indicates the dis-

tance from the dot (5) to the corner of the mask, marked with an arrow.

After copying the templates located on the next page, check the measurements so that the reference measurements cover enough of the beam pattern.

Adjusting headlamp pattern for Active Bi-Xenon Lights ABL see page 47.

06 Starting and driving

145

Adjusting headlamp pattern

06

Haloge

Location

LHD va Copy te urement the temp material

Referen Templat

Distance (5) =13 m

Templat Distance (8) = 18

n headlamps

of halogen headlamp masks, 1 and 2 = LHD variant, 3 and 4 = RHD variant

riant mplates 1 and 2. Check the meas- s to ensure they are correct. Transfer late to a self-adhesive, waterproof

and cut it out.

ce measurements e 1. (3) = 70 mm, (4) = 40 mm

to dot in headlamp lens: m.

e 2. (6) = 55 mm, (7) = 40 mm to dot in headlamp lens:

mm.

RHD variant Copy templates 3 and 4. Check the meas- urements to ensure they are correct. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive, waterproof material and cut it out.

Reference measurements Template 3. (1) = 55 mm, (2) = 41 mm

Distance to dot in headlamp lens: (5) = 17 mm.

Template 4. (6) = 70 mm, (7) = 39 mm

Distance to dot in headlamp lens: (8) = 14 mm.

06 Starting and driving

146

Adju

06

xx

Masking

Masking

sting headlamp pattern

templates for halogen headlamps, LHD variant

templates for halogen headlamps, RHD variant

06 Starting and driving

147

Adjusting headlamp pattern

06

Bi-Xen

Location

LHD va Copy te urement the temp material

Referen Templat

Distance (5) =29 m

Templat

Distance (8) =6 m

on headlamps

of Bi-Xenon headlamp masks, 1 and 2 = LHD variant, 3 and 4 = RHD variant

riant mplates 1 and 2. Check the meas- s to ensure they are correct. Transfer late to a self-adhesive, waterproof

and cut it out.

ce measurements e 1. (3) = 56 mm, (4) = 43 mm

to dot in headlamp lens: m.

e 2. (6) = 56 mm, (7) = 42 mm

to dot in headlamp lens: m.

RHD variant Copy templates 3 and 4. Check the meas- urements to ensure they are correct. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive, waterproof material and cut it out.

Reference measurements Template 3. (1) = 56 mm, (2) = 42 mm

Distance to dot in headlamp lens: (5) = 29 mm.

Template 4. (6) = 56 mm, (7) = 41 mm

Distance to dot in headlamp lens: (8) = 0 mm.

06 Starting and driving

148

Adju

06

Masking

Masking

sting headlamp pattern

templates for Bi-Xenon headlamps, LHD variant

templates for Bi-Xenon headlamps, RHD variant

06 Starting and driving

149

pot Information System) option

06

1 BLIS 3 BLIS

BLIS is a cates w ing in th «blind sp

BLIS also has an integrated function which warns the driver if a fault should arise in the system. If, for example, the systems camer- as are obscured then the BLIS indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown in the dash- board display (see the table on page 151). In such cases, check and clean the lenses. If necessary, the system can be switched off temporarily by pressing the BLIS button (see page 151).

When BLIS operates The system operates when the car is driven at a speed above 10 km/h.

When you overtake another vehicle The system reacts if you overtake another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle.

W

The sy replace rors. It and re sibility the dri

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.

BLIS (Blind S

camera, 2 Indicator lamp, symbol

n information system which indi- hether there is another vehicle mov- e same direction in the so-called ot».

Blind spots covered by BLIS Distance A = approx. 9.5 m Distance B = approx. 3 m

The system is designed to work most effec- tively when driving in dense traffic on multi- lane highways.

BLIS is based on digital camera technology. The cameras (1) are fitted under the door mir- rors.

When a camera has detected a vehicle inside the blind spot zone then an indicator lamp is lit in the door panel (2). The light illuminates with a constant glow to draw the drivers at- tention to a vehicle in the blind spot.

ARNING

stem is a supplement to, and not a ment for, the existing rearview mir-

can never replace the awareness sponsibility of the driver. The respon- for changing lanes safely rests with ver.

A B

06 Starting and driving

150

BLIS

06

When y vehicle The sys vehicle t you are

System darkne

Dayligh In daylig the surr signed t trucks, b

Darkne In darkn lamps o lamps a does no example

Cleaning In order to work most effectively the BLIS camera lenses must be clean. The lenses can be cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge. Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not scratched.

W

BLIS d BLIS d ing. A wide ceal ot preven from b

IMPORTANT

The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice or snow. If necessary, brush snow away from the lenses.

(Blind Spot Information System) option

ou are overtaken by another

tem reacts if you are overtaken by a ravelling up to 70 km/h faster than travelling.

function in daylight and ss

t ht the system reacts to the shape of

ounding vehicles. The system is de- o detect motor vehicles such as cars, uses and motorcycles

ss ess the system reacts to the head- f surrounding vehicles. If its head- re not switched on then the system t detect the vehicle. This means for that the system does not react to a

trailer without headlamps which is towed be- hind a car or truck.

ARNING

oes not work in sharp bends. oes not work when the car is revers-

trailer coupled to the car can con- her vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can t the vehicle in the screened area eing detected by BLIS.

WARNING

The system does not react to bicycles or mopeds. The BLIS cameras can be disrupted by in- tensive light or when driving in the dark when there are no light sources (e.g. street lighting or other vehicles). The system may then interpret the lack of light as if the cam- eras have been blocked. In both cases a message is shown on the information display. When driving in such conditions system performance may be temporarily reduced (see the information on the next page). When the text message disappears the sys- tem returns to full functionality. The BLIS cameras have the same limita- tions as the human eye, i.e. they «see» worse in heavy snowfall or thick fog for ex- ample.

06 Starting and driving

151

pot Information System) option

06

Switch

BLIS the ig lamp when

The s ing th the c The L syste is sho

BLIS butto nates displa pane

BLIS system messages

The messages above are only shown if the ignition key is in position II (or if the engine is running) and BLIS is active (i.e. if the driver has not switched off the system).

System status Text in the display

BLIS not functioning

BLIND-SPOT SYST SERVICE REQUIRED

Right-hand camera blocked

BLIND-SPOT SYST R CAMERA BLOCKED

Left-hand camera blocked

BLIND-SPOT SYST L CAMERA BLOCKED

Both cameras blocked

BLIND-SPOT SYST CAMERAS BLOCKED

BLIS system off BLIND-SPOT INFO SYSTEM OFF

BLIS system on BLIND-SPOT INFO SYSTEM ON

BLIS function reduced

BLIS FUNCTION REDUCED

BLIS (Blind S

ing off and reactivating BLIS

is activated automatically each time nition is switched on. The indicator s in the door panels flash three times the ignition is switched on. ystem can be switched off by press- e BLIS button in the switch panel in

entre console (see illustration above). ED in the button goes out when the m is switched off and a text message wn in the display in the dashboard. can be reactivated by pressing the n. An LED in the button then illumi- , a new text message is shown in the y and the indicator lamps in the door

ls flash three times. Press the READ

button, see page 44, to clear the text message.

152

General ……………………………………………………………………………………… 154 Tyre pressure ……………………………………………………………………………… 157 Warning triangle and spare wheel …………………………………………………. 159 Tyre pressure monitoring (option) …………………………………………………. 161 Changing wheels ………………………………………………………………………… 163

07 Wheels and tyres

154

Gene

07

Driving

The tyre acteristi pressure how the

When ch same ty also the wheels. sures sp see pag

Design The dim Example

New tyres Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/char- acteristics gradually deteri- orate. Therefore aim to get as fresh tyres as possible

when you replace them. This is especially im- portant with regard to winter tyres. The week and year of manufacture, the tyres DOT marking (Department of Transportation), are stated with four digits, for example 1502. The tyre in the illustration was manufactured in week 15 of 2002.

Tyre age All tyres older than six years should be checked by an expert even if they seem un- damaged. The reason for this is that tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can there- fore be affected due to the tyres constituent materials being broken down. In such a case the tyre should then not be used. This also applies to spare tyres, winter tyres and tyres saved for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuita- ble for use are cracks or discoloration.

The age of the tyre can be determined by the DOT marking, see illustration above.

205 S 55 R

w R R 16 R 91 T W S

ral

characteristics and tyres

s greatly affect the cars driving char- cs. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre and speed rating are important for

car performs.

anging tyres, ensure that tyres of the pe and dimensions, and preferably same make, are fitted to all four Follow the recommended tyre pres- ecified on the tyre pressure label, e 157.

ation of dimensions ensions are stated on all car tyres. : 205/55R16 91 W.

Speed ratings The car has «Whole Vehicle Type Approval», which means that dimensions and speed rat- ings must not differ from those specified on the vehicles registration document. The only exception to these conditions is winter tyres (both those with studs and those without). If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a max- imum of 160 km/h).

Remember that traffic regulations determine how fast a car can be driven, not the speed class of the tyres.

Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated. ection width (mm) atio between section height and idth (%) adial ply im diameter in inches («) yre load index (in this case 615 kg) peed rating (in this case 270 km/h).

Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres) T 190 km/h H 210 km/h V 240 km/h W 270 km/h Y 300 km/h

07 Wheels and tyres

155

General

07

More e

The corr even we best tra tyres, th rear tyre The first then at i differenc greatest to the re skidding shop if y

Wheels ing up, a

Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 5001000 km so the studs settle properly into the tyre. This gives the tyre, and espe- cially the studs, a longer lifespan.

Tread depth Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem- peratures place considerably higher de- mands on tyres than summer conditions. It is therefore not recommended to drive on win- ter tyres that have a tread depth of less than four mm.

Snow chains Snow chains may only be used on the front wheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drive cars.

Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres. Never use quick-fit snow chains as the space between the brake discs and the wheels is too small.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.

ven wear and maintenance

ect tyre pressure results in more ar, see page 158. To achieve the

ction and more even wear on the e regular switching of the front and s with each other is recommended. change should be after 5000 km and ntervals of 10000 km, this is to avoid es in tread depth. Tyres with the tread depth should always be fitted ar wheels to decrease the risk of . Contact an authorised Volvo work- ou are uncertain about tread depth.

should be stored lying down or hang- nd not standing up.

Tyres with tread wear indicators Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless bands across the width of the tread. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyres tread depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow.

Winter tyres Volvo recommends winter tyres with particu- lar dimensions. These are stated on the tyre pressure label, see page 157 for its location. The tyre dimensions are dependent on the engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, these must be fitted to all four wheels.

WARNING

A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control of the car.

NOTE

Ask a Volvo dealer which rim and tyre types are most suitable.

07 Wheels and tyres

156

Gene

07

Locking Locking minium ing whe wheel c must be Otherwi on the ri

acteristics and capacity to force rain, snow and slush out of the way are adversely affect- ed.

Tyres with the greatest tread depth should al- ways be fitted to the rear of the car (to de- crease the risk of skidding).

Wheels should be stored lying down or hang- ing up, and not standing up.

Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if you are uncertain about tread depth.

IM

Use Vo lent ch model, sult an

ral

wheel bolts wheel bolts can be used on both alu- and steel rims. If steel rims with lock- el bolts are used in combination with overs then the locking wheel bolts fitted furthest from the air valve. se the wheel cover cannot be fitted m.

Summer and winter wheels

The arrow shows the tyres direction of rotation

When summer and winter wheels are changed the wheels should be marked with which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right.

Tyres with tread patterns which are designed to only rotate in one direction have the direc- tion of rotation marked with an arrow on the tyre. The tyre should always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan.

Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the cars braking char-

PORTANT

lvo genuine snow chains or equiva- ains designed for the correct car and tyre and rim dimensions. Con- authorised Volvo workshop

07 Wheels and tyres

157

Tyre pressure

07

Recom

The tyre door pill shows w at differ

Stated o

Tyre whee

ECO Spare

Fuel economy, ECO pressure At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre pressure for full load is recommended in or- der to obtain optimum fuel economy.

Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and steering characteristics.

mended tyre pressure

pressure decal on the drivers side ar (between frame and rear door) hich pressures the tyres should have

ent loads and speed conditions.

n the decal:

pressure for the cars recommended l size pressure wheel pressure (Temporary Spare).

Checking the tyre pressure Check the tyre pressure regularly.

The correct tyre pressure is specified in the tyre pressure table on page 158. The speci- fied tyre pressures refer to «cold tyres». («Cold tyres» means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature.)

Even after several kilometres of driving the tyres warm up and the pressure increases, so air must not be released if the pressure is checked when the tyres are warm, while the pressure must be increased if it is too low.

Inadequately inflated tyres adversely affect fuel consumption, tyre lifespan and the cars roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre pres- sure that is too low can also result in the tyres overheating and disintegrating. For informa- tion on the correct tyre pressure, refer to the tyre pressure table.

NOTE

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.

07 Wheels and tyres

158

Tyre

07

Tyre pr

Varian Max. load

Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) T5 260 260

280 280

2601 2601

280 280 S60R 270 270

2701 2701

Miscell 260 260 280 280

2601 2601

Spare w Temp. s

420 420

420 420

1 ECO pr 2 R-mode

pressure

essure table

t Tyre size Speed (km/h)

Load, 1-3 persons Front (kPa) Rear (kPa)

215/55R16 0 160 220 220 235/40R18 160 + 260 260 225/45R17 0 160 2601 2601

205/55R16 160 + 250 250 235/45R17 0 250 240 240 235/40R18 0 160 2701 2701

aneous 195/65R15 0 160 220 220 205/55R16 160 + 250 250 215/55R16 225/45R17 235/40R18

0 160 2601 2601

heel, pare

T115/85R182 0 80 420 420

T125/80R17 0 80 420 420

essure, see page 157

ls

07 Wheels and tyres

159

arning triangle and spare wheel

07

Warnin

Follow t country

Use the Turn

cal po Caref

case. Remo

case Fold

warn Fold

triang locat situat

Spare wheel, tools and jack

1. Spare wheel1

2. Mounting 3. Tool kit1 with towing eye 4. Jack1

The spare wheel and jack and tool kit are lo- cated under the floor of the cargo area. Re- move the spare wheel as follows:

Fold the rear edge of the floor mat for- ward.

Remove the jack and tool kit. Unscrew the spare wheel and lift it out.

1 Option for certain variants and markets

3

4

2

1

W

g triangle (certain countries)

he warning triangle regulations of the you are in.

warning triangle as follows: both attachment screws to the verti- sition.

ully remove the warning triangle ve the warning triangle from its (A). out the four support legs on the ing triangle. out both red sides of the warning le. Place the warning triangle in a

ion that is appropriate for the traffic ion.

After use Pack everything in reverse order.

Make sure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the boot lid.

07 Wheels and tyres

160

Warn

07

If the c holder: Turn

corne Pull t

the b Lift th

lift it o Lift th Unsc Return a der. Ma curely in are prop

ing triangle and spare wheel

ar is equipped with a carrier bag

the two clips located at the rear r of the mat 90 degrees.

he front of the floor mat back towards oot lid opening. e mat slightly and turn 90 degress to ut. e mat out of the cargo area. rew the spare wheel and lift it out. nd secure everything in reverse or-

ke sure that the spare wheel is se- place and that the jack and tool kit erly secured.

Spare wheel, «Temporary spare» The spare wheel1 «Temporary Spare» should only be used for the short time it takes to re- pair or replace the normal tyre.

By law, it is only legal to use the spare wheel/ tyre temporarily in connection with damage to a tyre. A wheel/tyre of this type should be replaced with a normal wheel/tyre as soon as possible.

Remember also that this tyre combined with the normal tyres will affect driving char- acteristics. The maximum speed with the «Temporary Spare» — spare wheel is therefore 80 km/h.

1 Option for certain variants and markets

IMPORTANT

Only use the cars own genuine spare wheel! Tyres with other dimensions may cause damage to your car. Only one spare wheel may be used at a time.

07 Wheels and tyres

161

Tyre pressure monitoring (option)

07

Tyre pr

The Tyre the drive or more cated in When th 40 km/h sure. If t lamp on messag

Always wheel in wheels w

For info page 15

The sys mainten

Deactivating tyre pressure monitoring

Key position I or II. Turn the thumbwheel on the left-hand

stalk switch until the text TYRE PRESS. SYST ON is shown in the information dis- play.

Press and hold the RESET button until the text TYRE PRESS. SYST OFF is shown.

To reactivate the system repeat the same steps 13, so that TYRE PRESS. SYST ON is shown in the information display.

Recommendations Only factory fitted wheels are equipped with TPMS sensors in the valves.

The temporary spare wheel does not have this sensor.

If wheels without TPMS sensors are used then TYRE PRESS. SYST SERVICE REQUIRED will be shown every time the car is driven faster than 40 km/h for more than 10 minutes.

Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors are fitted to all wheels on the car (summer and winter wheels).

IM

If a fau system will illu SYST This ca wheel for Vol tem.

NOTE

The engine must not be running.

essure monitoring TPMS

Pressure Monitoring System warns r when the pressure is too low in one

of the cars tyres. It uses sensors lo- side the air valve in each wheel. e car is driven at approximately the system detects the tyre pres- he pressure is too low then a warning the dashboard illuminates and a e is shown in the information display.

check the system after changing a order to ensure that replacement ork with the system.

rmation on correct tyre pressure, see 7 158.

tem does not replace normal tyre ance.

Adjusting tyre pressure monitoring Tyre pressure monitoring can be adjusted in order to follow Volvos tyre pressure recom- mendations, when driving with a heavy load for example.

Inflate the tyres to the required pressure. Select key position I or II. Turn the thumbwheel on the left-hand

stalk switch until the text TYRE PRESSURE CALIBRATION is shown in the information display.

Press and hold the RESET button until the text TYRE PRESSURE CALIBRATED is shown.

Rectifying low tyre pressure When the message LOW TYRE PRESS. CHECK TYRES is shown in the information display:

Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres. Inflate the tyre(s) to the correct pressure. Drive the car for at least 1 minute in total

at at least 40 km/h and check that the message disappears.

PORTANT

lt should arise in the tyre pressure a warning lamp on the dashboard

minate. The message TYRE PRESS. SERVICE REQUIRED will be shown. n be for various reasons, e.g. fitting a

not equipped with a sensor adapted vos tyre pressure monitoring sys-

NOTE

The engine must not be running.

07 Wheels and tyres

162

Tyre

07

Volvo move

W

When hold th the val

WARNING

SST tyres should only be fitted by individu- als with expertise on SST tyres. SST tyres must only be fitted together with TPMS. After a fault message on low tyre pressure has been shown, do not drive faster than 80 km/h. Maximum driving distance to tyre change is 80 km. Avoid hard driving. SST tyres must be replaced if they are dam- aged or punctured.

pressure monitoring (option)

recommends that sensors are not d between different wheels.

Driveable punctured tyres (option) If the car has Self Supporting run flat Tyres (SST) then it is also equipped with TPMS.

This type of tyre has a specially reinforced side wall that makes continued driving possi- ble despite the tyre losing some air. These tyres are fitted on a special rim. (Normal tyres can also be fitted to this rim).

If an SST tyre loses tyre pressure then the yellow TPMS lamp on the instrument panel il- luminates and a message is shown in the text panel. If this occurs, reduce speed to max. 80 km/h. The tyre must be replaced as soon as possible.

Drive carefully, in some cases it can be diffi- cult to see which tyre is faulty. In order to es- tablish which tyre needs attention, check all four tyres.

ARNING

inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS, e nozzle of the pump directly against ve to avoid damaging the valve.

07 Wheels and tyres

163

Changing wheels

07

Remov

Remem you mus The spa the carg

Apply gear posit box.

Place whee Use h

There are two jacking points on each side of the car. Hold the jack against the pin in the jacking point as illustrated and crank the foot of the jack down so it is pressed squarely on the ground. Check that the jack sits in the anchorage as illustrated and that the foot is posi- tioned vertically under the anchorage.

Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the

wheel.

ing wheels

ber to set out the warning triangle if t change a wheel in a trafficked area. re wheel is under the plastic trough in o area.

the parking brake and engage 1st on cars with manual gearbox ion P on cars with automatic gear-

chocks in front of and behind the ls which will remain on the ground. eavy wooden blocks or large stones.

Cars with steel wheel rims have removable wheel covers. Prise off the wheel cover with a thick screwdriver or the like. If tools are not available, the wheel cover can be prised off by hand. Use protective gloves. When refitting the wheel cover, make sure the cover is properly aligned over the air valve.

Loosen the wheel bolts 1/2-1 with the socket wrench. Loosen the nuts by turning them anticlockwise.

07 Wheels and tyres

164

Chan

07

Fitting

Clean and h

Fit th Lowe

rotate Tight

impo ened the to

Put o

IMPORTANT

If TPMS is specified then the tyres must be calibrated after fitting. Read «Adjusting tyre pressure», see page 161.

ging wheels

the wheel

the contract surfaces on the wheel ub. e wheel. Screw the wheel nuts. r the car so that the wheel cannot .

en the wheel nuts crosswise. It is rtant that the wheel nuts are tight- properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check rque with a torque wrench. n the wheel cover (steel rim).

Certain variants.

WARNING

Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack. Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. Ensure that passengers wait with the car — or preferably a crash barrier — between them and the road.

07 Wheels and tyres

165

07

166

Cleaning ……………………………………………………………………………………. 168 Touching up paintwork ………………………………………………………………… 171 Rustproofing ……………………………………………………………………………… 172

08 Car care

168

Clea

08

Washin

Wash th Use car to corro

Do no Wash cause Wash water

Thoro the c

Rinse When that t not c not s

Wash plent

If the car u

Dry th a wat

Clean soap

Press the brake pedal lightly from time to time if driving for long periods in rain or slush. This heats and dries the brake pads. You should also do this when you begin driving in extremely damp or cold weather.

Exterior plastic parts A special cleaning agent, available from Vol- vo dealers, is recommended for cleaning ex- terior plastic parts. Never use strong stain re- movers.

W

Always shop. T hot.

WARNING

Always test the brakes after washing the car to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake pads and reduce brak- ing performance.

IMPORTANT

Washing by hand is gentler to the paintwork than an automatic car wash. Paintwork is also more sensitive when it is new. For this reason, handwashing is recommended dur- ing the first few months with a new car.

ning

g the car

e car as soon as it becomes dirty. shampoo. Dirt and road salt can lead sion.

t park the car in direct sunshine. ing a car with hot paintwork can permanent paintwork damage. the car in a car wash with waste separator. ughly rinse dirt off the underbody of

ar. the entire car to remove loose dirt. using a pressure washer: Make sure

he nozzle of the pressure washer is loser than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do pray directly at the locks. using a sponge, car shampoo and

y of lukewarm water. dirt is difficult to dislodge, wash the sing a cold degreasing agent. e car using a clean, soft chamois or er scraper. the wiper blades with a lukewarm

solution or car shampoo.

Removing bird droppings Wash bird droppings off the paintwork as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain chemicals that affect and discolour paint- work very quickly. This discoloration can only be removed by a specialist.

Chromed wheels

Automatic car washes An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car, but it can never re- place a proper handwashing. The brushes of an automatic car wash cannot reach everywhere.

ARNING

have the engine cleaned by a work- here is a risk of fire if the engine is

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp when it has been switched on for a time.

IMPORTANT

Rim cleaning agents can cause stains on chrome-plated wheels. Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of luke- warm water.

08 Car care

169

Cleaning

08

Polishi Polish a or to giv

The car is at leas be waxe wax the

Wash an begin po and tar s white sp moved u car pain

Polish fi liquid or the pack contain

Cleaning the interior

Treating stains on fabric upholstery A special cleaning agent, available from Vol- vo dealers, is recommended for cleaning the fabric upholstery. Other chemicals can impair the fire retardant qualities of the upholstery.

Treating stains on leather upholstery Volvos leather upholstery is equipped with surface protection against dirt. Cleaning re- protects the leather but grease and dirt dis- solves the surface protection. There is a comprehensive programme for the care and maintenance of leather upholstery. Volvo of- fers a leather product for cleaning and treat- ing the upholstery by which means the leath- er regains its protective layer.

IM

Paint t protec damag caused Volvo w

IMPORTANT

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.

IMPORTANT

Never use strong solvents. Such products may damage fabric, vinyl and leather uphol- stery.

ng and waxing nd wax the car if the paintwork is dull e the paintwork extra protection.

does not need to be polished until it t one year old. However, the car can d during this time. Do not polish or car in direct sunlight.

d dry the car thoroughly before you lishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt tains using Volvo tar remover or irit. More stubborn marks can be re- sing fine rubbing paste designed for

twork.

rst with a polish and then wax with solid wax. Follow the instructions on aging carefully. Many preparations

both polish and wax.

Cleaning door mirrors with water- repellent surface (option) Never use products such as car wax, de- greaser or similar on mirror surfaces as this could ruin their water-repellent properties.

Take care when cleaning so as not to dam- age the glass surface.

To avoid damaging glass surfaces when re- moving ice only use plastic ice scrapers.

There is natural wear of the water-repellent coating.

Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recommend- ed in order to maintain the water-repellent properties. This should first be used after three years and then each year.

PORTANT

reatment such as preserving, sealing, tion, lustre sealing or similar could e the paintwork. Paintwork damage by such treatment is not covered by arranty.

08 Car care

170

Clea

08

To achie cleaning cream tw

Ask you care pro

Washin uphols Pour

spon Work

move Dab t

Allow not ru

Wipe allow

Protect stery Pour

cream a thin move

Now 20 m

IM

Note th when d may di

ning

ve best results Volvo recommends and application of the protective o to four times per year.

r Volvo dealer about Volvos Leather duct

g instructions for leather tery the leather cleaner on the dampened ge and squeeze out a strong foam. the dirt away with gentle circular ments. he sponge accurately on the stains. the sponge to absorb the stain. Do b.

off with soft paper or a cloth and the leather to dry completely. ive treatment of leather uphol-

a small amount of the protective on the felted cloth and massage in

layer of cream with gentle circular ments on the leather. allow the leather to dry for inutes before use.

The leather has now been given improved protection against stains and a UV filter.

Treating spots on interior plastic parts and surfaces A special cleaning agent, available from Vol- vo dealers, is recommended for cleaning in- terior plastic parts and surfaces. Do not scrape or rub spots. Never use strong stain removers.

Cleaning seatbelts Use water and a synthetic detergent. A spe- cial textile cleaning agent is available from you Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.

PORTANT

at materials with colour that runs ry (new jeans, suede garments etc.)

scolour the upholstery material.

08 Car care

171

Touching up paintwork

08

Paintw

Paint is proofing regularly aged pa ly. The m damage marks o

Colour

Data pla

It is imp The colo data pla

If the stone chip has penetrated to the bare metal Fasten a piece of masking tape over the

damaged surface. Then remove the tape, removing any paint residue.

Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush or matchstick. Apply paint using a brush once the primer is dry.

For scratches, proceed as above, but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork.

After a few days, polish the touched-up areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of lapping paste.

ork

an important part of the cars rust- and should therefore be checked . To avoid the onset of rust, dam- intwork must be rectified immediate- ost common types of paintwork

are stone chips, scratches, and n the edges of wings and doors.

code

te

ortant that the correct colour is used. ur code number (1) is shown on the te, see page 242.

Stone chips and scratches

Before touching up paintwork, the car must be clean and dry and at a temperature above 15 C.

Materials Primer in a can Paint in a can or touch-up pen Brush Masking tape.

Minor stone chips and scratches If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare metal and there is an undamaged colour coat, you can paint straight after cleaning the damaged area.

08 Car care

172

Rust

08

Inspec

Your ca rustproo are mad derbody anti-cor trating r member

Maintain

Keep body nozzl surfa

Regu proof

The car quire tre After tha year inte consult

proofing

tion and maintenance

r received a thorough and complete fing at the factory. Parts of the body e of galvanised sheet metal. The un- is protected by a wear-resistant rosion compound. And, a thin, pene- ustproofing fluid was sprayed into the s, cavities and closed sections.

ing the cars rustproofing.

the car clean. Hose down the under- . If using a pressure washer, keep the e at least 30 cm from the painted ces. larly check and touch-up the rust- ing treatment as necessary. s rustproofing does not normally re- atment for approximately12 years. t time, it should be treated at three rvals. If the car requires treatment, an authorised Volvo workshop.

174

Volvo service ……………………………………………………………………………… 176 Self-maintenance ……………………………………………………………………….. 177 Bonnet and engine compartment …………………………………………………. 178 Diesel ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 179 Oils and fluids ……………………………………………………………………………. 180 Wiper blades ……………………………………………………………………………… 184 Battery ……………………………………………………………………………………… 185 Replacing bulbs …………………………………………………………………………. 188 Fuses ………………………………………………………………………………………… 195

09 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

09 Maintenance and service

176

Volvo09

Volvo s

Before t oughly t accorda ulations

To keep possible gramme ty Book shop ca work. Vo special tee the h

Specia Certain cars ele formed develop authoris or perfo electrica

Corporation will not disclose the stored infor- mation without consent. However, Volvo Car Corporation may be forced to disclose the in- formation due to national legislation. Volvo Car Corporation and authorised Volvo work- shops may also read and use the informa- tion.

IM

For the follow Warran

service

ervice programme

he car left the factory, it was thor- est driven. It was checked again in nce with Volvo Car Corporation reg- before it was handed over to you.

your Volvo as safe and reliable as , follow the Volvo service pro- specified in the Service and Warran- let. Have an authorised Volvo work- rry out service and maintenance lvo workshops have the personnel,

tools and service literature to guaran- ighest quality of service.

l service measures service measures, which affect the ctrical system, can only be per-

using electronic equipment specially ed for your car. Always contact an ed Volvo workshop before beginning rming service work that affects the l system.

Installing accessories The incorrect connection and installation of accessories can negatively affect the cars electrical system. Certain accessories only function when the appropriate software has been programmed into the cars electrical system. Always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before installing accessories which are connected to or affect the electri- cal system.

Recording vehicle data One or more of the computers in your Volvo are capable of recording detailed informa- tion. This information is intended for use in research to enhance safety and for diagnos- ing faults in some of the in-car systems. The data may include details regarding seatbelt use by the driver and passengers, the func- tions of various vehicle systems and mod- ules, and status information about the en- gine, throttle, steering, brakes and other sys- tems. This data can also include details of the way the car is driven. This type of infor- mation can include, without being limited to, specific details such as vehicle speed, the use of the brake and accelerator pedals and steering wheel position. This latter type of data can be stored for a limited period while the car is being driven and subsequently dur- ing a collision or a near-collision. Volvo Car

PORTANT

Volvo warranty to apply, check and the instructions in the Service and ty Booklet.

09 Maintenance and service

177

Self-maintenance 09

Before

Battery Check t connect

Never d gine is r

Never u tery. The ed when

The batt sive and ronmen dealer a

Check regularly Check the following at regular intervals, for example, when refuelling:

Coolant The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank.

Engine oil The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

Power steering fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

Washer fluid The reservoir should be well filled. Use washer antifreeze at tempera- tures around freezing.

Brake and clutch fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

W

The ca age! The vo ous! Do not the ign or the The ign

Cond Repla

as sp ignitio

WARNING

Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start automatically some time after the engine has been switched off. Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

starting work on the car

hat the battery cables are correctly ed and tightened.

isconnect the battery when the en- unning (e.g. if replacing the battery).

se a quick charger to charge the bat- battery cables must be disconnect- charging the battery.

ery contains acid that is both corro- toxic. Handle the battery in an envi-

tally-suitable way. Let your Volvo ssist you.

Lifting the car

If the car is lifted with a workshop jack, it should sit with the front edge on the engine support arm. Do not damage the splash- guard under the engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always use axle stands or the like.

If you raise the car using a two pillar work- shop lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are fixed under the lifting points on the door sill. See the illustration.

ARNING

r ignition system has very high volt-

ltage in the ignition system is danger-

touch spark plugs, ignition cables or ition coil when the engine is running ignition is switched on! ition should be switched off when: ucting engine tests. cing parts in the ignition system, such ark plugs, ignition coil, distributor, n cables, etc.

09 Maintenance and service

178

Bonn09

Openin

Left and

To open

Pull t dash relea

Inser front safet

Open

7. Engine oil filler pipe 8. a) Clutch/brake fluid reservoir

(left-hand drive car). b) Clutch/brake fluid reservoir (right-hand drive car).

9. Relay/fuse box. 10.Air filter. (The cover has a different

design depending on engine variant.) 11.Battery (in cargo area)

W

Check closed

et and engine compartment

g the bonnet

right-hand drive cars.

the bonnet:

he handle on the far left under the board. You will hear when the catch ses. t your hand under the centre of the edge of the bonnet and press the y catch to the right. the bonnet.

Engine compartment The appearance of the engine compartment may vary slightly due to engine variant. How- ever, the components listed are in the same positions.

1. Expansion tank, cooling system 2. Power steering fluid reservoir. 3. Washer fluid reservoir 4. Engine oil dipstick 5. Radiator 6. Radiator fan

ARNING

that the bonnet locks properly when .

09 Maintenance and service

179

Diesel 09

Fuel sy Diesel m standard contami phur pa fuel from diesel o

At low te paraffin el, which cial dies around major oi at low te paraffin

The risk duced if fuelling, filler pip paintwo gent and

IM

Diesel specia oil, RM oil. The in acco and ge damag warran

stem ust fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 s. Diesel engines are sensitive to

nants such as high volumes of sul- rticles for example. Only use diesel a well-known producers. Never use

f dubious quality.

mperatures (40 C to 6 C), a precipitate may form in the diesel fu- can lead to ignition problems. Spe-

el fuel designed for low temperatures freezing point is available from the l companies. This fuel is less viscous mperatures and reduces the risk of precipitate.

of condensation in the fuel tank is re- the tank is kept well filled. When re- check that the area around the fuel e is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the rk. Wash off any spillage with deter- water.

Empty tank No special procedures are required if the tank is run dry. The fuel system is bled auto- matically if the ignition switch is kept in position II for approx. 60 seconds before the start attempt.

Draining condensation from the fuel filter The fuel filter separates condensation from the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine operation.

The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Book- let or if you suspect that the car has been filled with contaminated fuel.

PORTANT

type fuels which must not be used: l additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fuel E (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegetable se fuels do not fulfil the requirements rdance with Volvo recommendations nerate increased wear and engine e that is not covered by the Volvo ty.

IMPORTANT

For model year 2006 or later the sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.

IMPORTANT

Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter.

09 Maintenance and service

180

Oils 09

Engine grade

Volvo re

Using o permitte

Volvo uses different systems for warning of low oil level or low oil pressure. Certain vari- ants have an oil pressure sensor, and then a lamp is used for oil pressure. Other variants have an oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed via the warning symbol in the centre of the instrument unit as well as by display texts.

IM

Always the eng Check the oil The en oil is us level to

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the en- gines service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consump- tion and environmental impact. An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk af- fecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental im- pact. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warran- ty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

and fluids

compartment decal for oil

commends oil products.

il of a higher than specified grade is d. Volvo recommends using an oil of

a higher grade than that specified on the de- cal for adverse driving conditions. See page 247.

Adverse driving conditions Check the oil level more frequently for long journeys:

towing a caravan or trailer. in mountainous regions. at high speeds. in temperatures colder than 30 C or

hotter than +40 C. shorter driving distances (shorter than

10 km) at low temperatures (under 5 C) This may result in abnormally high oil temper- ature or oil consumption.

Checking and changing the engine oil and oil filter Change the oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

PORTANT

use oil of the prescribed grade, see ine compartment decal.

the oil level frequently and change regularly. gine will be damaged if lower grade ed or if the car is driven with the oil o low. IMPORTANT

When filling oil to top up a low oil level, the oil being filled must be of the same grade and viscosity as the oil in the engine.

09 Maintenance and service

181

Oils and fluids 09

Certain an autho tion.

Checkin cially im change. specifie changes

Volvo re every 2 ments a starting. if taken switche the leve had time

Checking the oil in a warm engine: Park the car on a level surface, switch off

the engine and wait 1015 minutes to allow the oil time to run back to the sump.

Wipe the dipstick clean before checking the level.

Check the oil level using the dipstick. The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

If the level is close to the MIN mark, start by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up until the oil level is nearer the MAX than the MIN mark on the dipstick. See page 246247 for capacities.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust mani- fold due to the risk of fire.

IMPORTANT

Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil con- sumption may increase if too much oil is poured into the engine.

models have both variants. Contact rised Volvo dealer for more informa-

g the oil level in a new car is espe- portant before the first scheduled oil The Service and Warranty Booklet s the odometer readings for oil .

commends checking the oil level 500 km. The most accurate measure- re made on a cold engine before The measurement will be inaccurate immediately after the engine is d off. The dipstick will indicate that l is too low because the oil has not to flow down into the oil sump.

Checking the oil

The oil level must be within the area marked on the dipstick

Checking the oil in a cold engine: Wipe the dipstick clean before checking

the level. Check the oil level using the dipstick. The

oil level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

If the level is close to the MIN mark, start by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up until the oil level is nearer the MAX than the MIN mark on the dipstick. See page 246247 for capacities.

09 Maintenance and service

182

Oils 09

Washe

Washer f

The win the sam recomm

Use was fluid doe and hos

Tip: clea washer

IMPORTANT

Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo. New cars are filled with coolant that can withstand tem- peratures down to approximately 35 C. The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. High temperatures can occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks) to the cylinder head.

WARNING

The coolant may be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.

and fluids

r fluid reservoir

luid reservoir

dscreen and headlamp washers have e fluid reservoir. See capacities and ended grade for fluids on page 249.

her fluid during the winter so that the s not freeze in the pump, reservoir es.

n the wiper blades when topping up fluid.

Coolant

Coolant reservoir.

Check the coolant regularly. The level should lie between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank. Top up with fluid when the level has fallen to the MIN mark.

See capacities and recommended grade for fluids and oils on page 249.

When topping up the coolant, follow the in- structions on the packaging. It is important that the mixture of coolant concentrate and water is correct for the prevailing weather conditions. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate.

09 Maintenance and service

183

Oils and fluids 09

Clutch

Location right-han

The bra reservoi MIN and larly. Ch or at eve

See cap fluids an

Power steering fluid reservoir

Check the level at every service. It is not nec- essary to change the fluid. The level should lie between the ADD and FULL marks.

See capacities and recommended grade for fluids and oils on page 249.

NO

The flu cars dr quent or trop

NOTE

It is possible to steer if a fault should occur in the power steering system or if the car loses electrical power and requires towing. Bear in mind that steering will be more diffi- cult than normal and more force will be re- quired to turn the steering wheel.

and brake fluid reservoir

dependent on whether car is left or d drive.

ke and clutch fluid have a common r. The fluid level must be between the MAX marks. Check the level regu- ange the brake fluid every other year ry other regular service.

acities and recommended grade for d oils on page 249.

TE

id should be changed annually on iven in conditions requiring hard, fre- braking, such as driving in mountains ical climates with high humidity.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

09 Maintenance and service

184

Wipe09

Replac

Fold wiper

Press wiper exten

Fit th chec

NO

Bear in drivers passen

r blades

ing windscreen wiper blades

out the wiper arm and grasp the blade. in the ribbed spring catch on the blade while lifting it off at the arm sion. e new blade in reverse order and k that it is properly secured.

Replacing a headlamp wiper blade1

Fold the wiper arm forward. Pull the wiper blade outward. Press the new wiper blade into position. Check that the blade is firmly installed.

TE

mind that the wiper blade on the side is longer than the one on the ger side.

1Applies to the S60 R.

09 Maintenance and service

185

Battery 09

Battery

There m They are

The serv influenc starts, d ditions a

IM

Always tery wa

NO

An exp environ contain

WARNING

Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect the jump leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode. The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical atten- tion immediately.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it be- comes discharged repeatedly.

care

ay be two different types of battery. fully interchangeable with each other.

ice life and function of the battery is ed by factors such as the number of ischarging, driving style, driving con- nd climatic conditions.

For the battery to function satisfactorily:

Regularly check that the electrolyte level is correct (A) and never fill above the level mark.

Check all cells. Use a screwdriver to re- move the cell caps (or the cover).

If necessary, top up with distilled water to the batterys maximum mark.

Tighten the cell caps (or cover) firmly.

PORTANT

use distilled or deionised water (bat- ter).

TE

ended battery must be recycled in an mentally responsible manner as it s lead.

09 Maintenance and service

186

Batte09

Symbo Changing the battery

Removing the battery Switch off the ignition and remove the key. Wait at least 5 minutes before touching

any electrical terminals. This allows time for the information in the cars electrical system to be stored in the control mod- ules.

Undo the screws from the lock brace over the battery and remove the brace.

Bend up the plastic cover over the nega- tive battery terminal or unscrew the cover from the battery.

Disconnect the negative battery lead.

ry

ls on the battery Use protective goggles.

Further information in the owners manual.

Store the battery out of the reach of children.

The battery contains corro- sive acid.

Avoid sparks and naked flames.

Risk of explosion.

09 Maintenance and service

187

Battery 09

Detac tery.

Bend nect

Undo Remo

Fitting Fit th Posit

place Conn

fold d Conn

plast Fit th

batte Make

ly con outle

Fit th tighte

h the lower console holding the bat-

aside the plastic cover and discon- the positive cable. the evacuation hose. ve the battery.

the battery e battery into position. ion the lower console and screw it in . ect the positive cable, press in and own the plastic cover. ect the negative cable, fold down the ic cover. e plastic cover or the cover over the ry. sure the evacuation hose is correct- nected to both the battery and the

t in the bodywork. e lock brace over the battery and n the screws.

09 Maintenance and service

188

Repl09

Genera

All bulb

The follo source l ble for c

Activ Gene Read Glove Direc Appr High- LEDs

Location of the bulbs in the headlamp

1. Side marker lamp 2. Direction indicator 3. Dipped beam lamp, position lamp

(halogen and Bi-Xenon) 4. Main beam lamp, position lamp

(Active Bi-Xenon) On certain variants, a white plastic sleeve may impede bulb replacement. This can be broken off and discarded.

W

On car headla lamp m Volvo w handle voltage

IM

Never gers. G vaporis ing the

acing bulbs

l

specifications are given on page 255.

wing list contains bulbs and point- amps that are specialised or unsuita- hanging except at a workshop:

e Bi-Xenon and Bi-Xenon lamp ral interior lighting in the roof ing lamps box lighting tion indicators in the door mirrors oach lighting in the door mirrors level brake light in the rear lamp cluster.

Changing front bulbs

All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) are changed by first removing the lamp housing from the engine compartment.

ARNING

s with Bi-Xenon and Active Bi-Xenon mps the replacement of the Xenon ust be carried out by an authorised orkshop. The headlamps must be

d with extreme care due to the high- unit in the Xenon lamp.

PORTANT

touch the bulbs glass with your fin- rease and oils from your fingers are ed by the heat, coating and damag- reflector.

NOTE

If you experience difficulty when replacing a bulb then we recommend that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

09 Maintenance and service

189

Replacing bulbs 09

Dipped

To rem Switc

key to Remo Unplu Disco

the ri and t

Pull o

Main beam

To remove the bulb Switch off all lights and turn the ignition

key to position 0. Remove the cover. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and pull it out. Undo the connector by pressing the catch

out and then pulling.

To fit Plug the connector into the bulb, a click is

heard. Refit the bulb, turn it in position. Refit the cover.

beam, halogen

ove the bulb h off all lights and turn the ignition position 0. ve the cover. g the connector. nnect the spring clamp. First push to

ght so that the spring disconnects hen out and down. ut and remove the bulb.

To fit Fit the new bulb. In can only be positioned

one way. Press the clamp spring upwards and a

little to the left so that it secures in its catch.

Plug in the connector. Refit the cover.

09 Maintenance and service

190

Repl09

Positio

Halogen

To rem Switc

key to Remo

dippe Pull o Unplu

To fit Fit th Plug Refit

Direction indicator, left-hand side

To remove the bulb Switch off all lights and turn the ignition

key to position 0. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and

remove it. Press the bulb inwards, turn it anticlock-

wise and remove it from the bulb holder.

To fit Fit the new bulb by pressing it in and

turning it clockwise. Refit the bulb holder in the lamp housing

and turn it clockwise.

acing bulbs

n/parking lamps

and Bi-Xenon headlamps

ove the bulb h off all lights and turn the ignition position 0. ve the cover (same cover as for d beam). ut the lamp. g the connector.

e new bulb. in the connector. the cover.

Active Bi-Xenon headlamps

To remove the bulb Switch off all lights and turn the ignition

key to position 0. Remove the cover (same cover as for

dipped beam). Pull out the lamp. Unplug the connector.

To fit Fit the new bulb. Plug in the connector. Refit the cover.

09 Maintenance and service

191

Replacing bulbs 09

Directi

Switc key to

Remo radia

Remo Pull t Remo

pipe. Repla Chec

ket b is pro

Put th

Side marker lamps

Turn the bulb holder clockwise and pull it out.

Replace the bulb. Refit the bulb holder by turning it anti-

clockwise.

on indicator, right-hand side

h off all lights and turn the ignition position 0. ve the radiator hose (1) from the

tor. ve the screw (2) to the filler pipe.

he pipe (3) straight up. ve the ventilation hose (4) from the

ce the bulb. k that the washer fluid reservoir gas- etween the filler pipe and the holder perly secured. e filler pipe (3) back into place.

Refit the ventilation hose onto the filler pipe (4).

Screw in the screw (2) to the filler pipe and refit the radiator hose to the radiator (1).

09 Maintenance and service

192

Repl09

Front f

To rem Switc

key to Turn Pull o

To fit Fit th

one w Refit

slight

Number plate lighting

Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key to position 0.

Remove the screw with a screwdriver. Carefully remove the entire lamp housing

and pull it out. Turn the contact anticlock- wise and pull out the bulb.

Fit the new bulb. Plug in the connector and turn it clockwise

in the lamp housing. Refit the entire lamp housing and screw it

into place.

acing bulbs

og lamps (option)

ove the bulb h off all lights and turn the ignition position 0.

the bulb holder slightly anticlockwise. ut and remove the bulb.

e new bulb. In can only be positioned ay.

the bulb holder, turn it clockwise ly. The «TOP» mark must be upward.

Cargo area

Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that the lamp housing comes loose.

Remove the bulb. Fit a new bulb. Refit the lamp housing.

09 Maintenance and service

193

Replacing bulbs 09

Rear lig

Locatio 1. Brak 2. Posi 3. Rea 4. Side 5. Dire

Revers All bulbs placed f

Bulb sp page 25

Remove the bulb Fit the new bulb in the holder. Plug in the connector. Close and secure the side panel.

NOTE

If the message BULB FAILURE/CHECK STOP LAMP remains after a faulty bulb has been replaced then an authorised Volvo workshop must be consulted.

ht cluster

n of bulbs e light tion/parking lamps r fog lamp (one side) marker lamps ction indicators

ing lamp Removal in the rear lamp cluster can be re- rom inside the cargo area.

ecifications can be found on 5.

Switch off all lights and turn the ignition key to position 0.

Unlock and fold down the side panel to access the bulbs.

The bulbs are located in two separate bulb holders, an upper and a lower. Each bulb holder has a locking pin.

To replace the bulb Detach the connector from the bulb

holder. Press the catches together and pull out

the holder.

09 Maintenance and service

194

Repl09

Courte

There is dashboa sides. Inser

the la Remo Fit a n Refit

acing bulbs

sy lighting

courtesy lighting under the rd on the driver and passenger

t a screwdriver and gently turn so that mp housing comes loose. ve the bulb. ew bulb.

the lamp housing.

Vanity mirror lighting

Vanity mirror, different versions

Insert a screwdriver and turn so that the lamp lens releases.

Remove the bulb. Fit a new bulb. First press the bottom of the lamp glass

back into place above the four hooks. Then press the top in place.

09 Maintenance and service

195

Fuses 09

Genera

Cable ro same po

All elect fused to from da overload

Fuses a in the ca

1. Rela men

2. Fuse men drive

Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown.

If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.

There are a number of spare fuses in the cov- er on the end of the dashboard. There are also pliers which facilitate the removal and fitting of fuses.

If the same fuse blows repeatedly, there is a fault in the component, and you should con- tact an authorised Volvo workshop to have it checked.

l

uting may vary slightly due to engine variant. However, the components listed are in the sitions.

rical functions and components are protect your cars electrical system mage by short circuiting and ing.

re housed in four different locations r:

y/fuse box in the engine compart- t. box in the passenger compart- t within the sound barrier on the rs side.

3. Fuse box in the passenger compart- ment at dashboard end on drivers side.

4. Fuse box in cargo area.

Changing If an electrical component or function does not work, this may be because the compo- nents fuse was temporarily overloaded and blew.

Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.

09

09 Maintenance and service

196

Fuse

Relay/f

Press in

1. ABS 2. ABS 3. High 4. Park 5. Auxi 6. Star 7. Wind 8. Fuel 9. Tran 10. Ignit

injec

ensor (APM), AC compressor, ………………………………………………….. 10 A ule (ECM) (petrol) injection valves (petrol), … r (petrol)………………………………………. 15 A r (diesel) ……………………………………….. 5 A odule (ETM), (petrol)……………………… 10 A odule (ETM), air mixing valve, tor, solenoid valve, (diesel) …………….. 15 A ol)……………………………………………….. 20 A el) ………………………………………………. 10 A on heater, solenoid valves (petrol)…….. 10 A w plugs (diesel) …………………………….. 15 A …………………………………………………… 20 A

s

use box in the engine compartment

the plastic catches on the short sides of the box and pull the cover upward.

. ……………………………………………………………………………… 30 A ………………………………………………………………………. 30 A -pressure washer, headlamps ……………………………… 35 A ing heater (option)………………………………………………. 25 A liary lamps (option)……………………………………………… 20 A ter motor relay……………………………………………………. 35 A screen wipers …………………………………………………… 25 A

pump ………………………………………………………………. 15 A smission control module (TCM), diesel, R-models ……. 15 A ion coils (petrol), engine control module (ECM), tion valves (diesel) ……………………………………………… 20 A

11.Accelerator pedal s fan electronics box

12.Engine control mod mass air flow senso mass air flow senso

13.Electronic throttle m Electronic throttle m fuel pressure regula

14.Lambda-sond (petr Lambda-sond (dies

15.Crankcase ventilati solenoid valves, glo

16.Dipped beam, left .

09

09 Maintenance and service

197

Fuses

17.Dipp 18.- …. 19.Engi 20.Posi 21. ……

ed beam, right …………………………………………………… 20 A ………………………………………………………………………………- ne control module (ECM) supply, engine relay ……………5 A tion lamps …………………………………………………………. 15 A ………………………………………………………………………………-

09

09 Maintenance and service

198

Fuse

Fuses face on

A decal w

1. Pow 2. Pow 3. Clim 4. Con 5. Con 6. Gen

Upp 7. Sun 8. Ignit

deac imm dies

(LSM), Steering Angle Sensor (SAS), dule (SWM) …………………………………….. 5 A …………………………………………………… 20 A …………………………………………………… 30 A …………………………………………………… 10 A …………………………………………………….. 5 A ………………………………………………………… —

s

in the passenger compartment at dashboard end drivers side

hich indicates the positions and amperages of the fuses is located in the end box cover.

er drivers seat …………………………………………………………. 25 A er passenger seat ………………………………………………. 25 A ate control system fan ………………………………………… 30 A trol module, right front door………………………………….. 25 A trol module, left front door ……………………………………. 25 A eral lighting, ceiling (RCM) er electronic module (UEM) ………………………………….. 10 A roof ………………………………………………………………….. 15 A ion switch, SRS system, engine control module (ECM) tivating SRS passenger side, (PACOS), electronic

obiliser (IMMO), transmission control module (TCM), el, R-models …………………………………………………….. 7.5 A

9. OBDII, light switch Steering Wheel Mo

10.Audio ……………….. 11.Amplifier ………….. 12.RTI display ………… 13.Phone ………………. 14. 38………………….

09

09 Maintenance and service

199

Fuses

Fuses barrier

1. Seat 2. Seat 3. Horn 4. — …. 5. — …. 6. Rese 7. Rese 8. Sire 9. Brak 10.Com

park

socket ………………………………………… 15 A ………………………………………………………… — ………………………………………………………… — 60 R) ………………………………………….. 15 A

…………………………………………………….. 5 A eering (ECPS), Active Bi-Xenon (HCM), …………………………………………………….10 A ………………………………………………….. 7.5 A t ……………………………………………….. 7.5 A ………………………………………………………… — ………………………………………………………… —

in the passenger compartment within the sound on the drivers side

heating, right side ……………………………………………………. 15 A heating, left side ……………………………………………….. 15 A ………………………………………………………………………. 15 A

………………………………………………………………………………-

………………………………………………………………………………- rve ………………………………………………………………………..- rve ………………………………………………………………………..-

n…………………………………………………………………………5 A e lamp switch feed ……………………………………………….5 A bined instrument panel (DIM), climate control (CCM), ing heater, power drivers seat ……………………………… 10 A

11.Front and rear seat 12. -………………………. 13.Reserve ……………. 14.Headlamp wipers (S 15.ABS, STC/DSTC … 16.Electronic power st

headlamp levelling 17.Fog lamp, front left 18.Fog lamp, front righ 19.Reserve ……………. 20.Reserve …………….

09

09 Maintenance and service

200

Fuse

21.Tran (M66

22.Main 23.Main 24.- …. 25. — …. 26.Rese 27.Rese 28.Pow 29.BiFu 30.BLIS 31.Rese 32.Rese 33.Vacu 34.Was 35.- …. 36. — ….

s

smission Control Module (TCM), reverse gear inhibitor ) ……………………………………………………………………… 10 A beam, left ………………………………………………………… 10 A beam, right………………………………………………………. 10 A

………………………………………………………………………………-

………………………………………………………………………………- rve ………………………………………………………………………..- rve ………………………………………………………………………..-

er passenger seat, audio ………………………………………..5 A el, fuel pump…………………………………………………….. 7.5 A …………………………………………………………………………5 A rve ………………………………………………………………………..- rve ………………………………………………………………………..- um pump …………………………………………………………. 20 A

her pump, headlamp wipers (S60 R) ………………………. 15 A ………………………………………………………………………………- ………………………………………………………………………………-

09

09 Maintenance and service

201

Fuses

Fuses ………………………………………………………….10 A lamps, cargo area lighting, number in brake lighting …………………………… 20 A …………………………………………………… 15 A ………………………………………………………… — …………………………………………………… 10 A I………………………………………………… 7.5 A

ing (30-feed) …………………………………. 15 A …………………………………………………… 15 A wer window, power window lock………. 20 A er window, power window lock ………… 20 A ………………………………………………………… — ………………………………………………………… — …………………………………………………… 15 A ………………………………………………………… — ………………………………………………………… — ………………………………………………………… — …………………………………………………….. 5 A ………………………………………………………… — aint …………………………………………….. 15 A ing (15-feed) …………………………………. 20 A ………………………………………………………… — ………………………………………………………… — ………………………………………………….. 7.5 A …………………………………………………… 15 A ………………………………………………………… —

in the cargo area 1. Reversing lamp……. 2. Position lamps, fog

plate lighting, LEDs 3. Accessories (AEM) 4. Reserve ……………. 5. REM electronics …. 6. CD changer, TV, RT 7. Towing bracket wir 8. Cargo area socket. 9. Rear right door: po 10.Rear left door: pow 11.Reserve ……………. 12.Reserve ……………. 13.Diesel filter heater . 14. -………………………. 15.Reserve ……………. 16.Reserve ……………. 17.Audio accessories. 18.Reserve ……………. 19.Foldable head restr 20.Towing bracket wir 21.Reserve ……………. 22. -………………………. 23.AWD ……………….. 24.Four-C SUM………. 25. -……………………….

09

09 Maintenance and service

202

Fuse

26.Park 27.Main

Park 28.Cen 29.Trail 30.Trail

direc 31.Main 32.- …. 33. — …. 34. — …. 35. — …. 36. — …. 37.Hea 38.Hea

s

ing assistance …………………………………………………….. 5 A fuse: Towing bracket wiring, Four-C, ing assistance, AWD …………………………………………… 30 A tral locking system (PCL) ……………………………………… 15 A er lighting, left: position lamps, direction indicator …… 25 A er lighting, right: brake lamp, rear fog lamp, tion indicator ……………………………………………………. 25 A fuse: Fuse 37, 38………………………………………………. 40 A

………………………………………………………………………………-

………………………………………………………………………………-

………………………………………………………………………………-

………………………………………………………………………………-

………………………………………………………………………………- ted rear window………………………………………………….. 20 A ted rear window………………………………………………….. 20 A

09 Maintenance and service

203

09

204

Overview HU-450 ………………………………………………………………………..206 Overview HU-650……………………………………………………………………….. 207 Overview HU-850……………………………………………………………………….. 208 Audio functions HU-450/650/850 ………………………………………………….209 Audio functions HU-450 ………………………………………………………………. 210 Audio functions HU-650/850 ……………………………………………………….. 211 Radio functions HU-450/650/850 …………………………………………………. 212 Radio functions HU-450 ……………………………………………………………… 213 Radio functions HU-650/850 ……………………………………………………….. 214 Radio functions HU-450/650/850 …………………………………………………. 215 Cassette player HU-450 ……………………………………………………………….220 CD player HU-650 ……………………………………………………………………….221 Internal CD changer HU-850 …………………………………………………………222 External CD changer HU-450/650/850 (option) ……………………………….223 Dolby Surround Pro Logic II HU-850 ……………………………………………..224 Technical data …………………………………………………………………………….225 Phone functions (option) ………………………………………………………………226 Call options ………………………………………………………………………………..229 Memory functions ……………………………………………………………………….232 Menu functions …………………………………………………………………………..234 Miscellaneous information ……………………………………………………………239

10 Infotainment system

206

Over

10

1. POW VOL

2. PRE PUS Stor CD c

3. SOU PUS Ope Turn Rad Cas CD c

12.AUTO Automatic station preset 13.BASS Press out and turn

TREBLE Press out, pull and turn 14.REV Cassette Direction select

CD changer (option) Random 15.Cassette opening 16.Cassette eject

view HU-450

ER (On/Off) Press UME Turn SET/CD H MENU ed radio stations hanger (option) RCE H MENU ns main menu Press to select: io FM, AM sette hanger (option)

4. FADER Press out and turn BAL Press out, pull and turn

5. SCAN Automatic station search 6. EXIT Scroll back in the menu 7. Navigation buttons

CD/radio seek/change station or track Cassette Fast forward/rewind/select next/previous track

8. Display 9. FM Shortcut between FM1, FM2, FM3 10.AM Shortcut between AM1, AM2 11.TAPE Shortcut

10 Infotainment system

207

Overview HU-650

10

1. POW VOL

2. 1-6 CD c

3. BAS 4. TRE 5. BAL 6. FAD 7. SOU

PUS Ope Turn Rad

17.AUTO Automatic station preset 18.Display

ER (on/off) Press UME Turn Station setting buttons/selecting hanger position S Press out and turn BLE Press out and turn ANCE Press out and turn ER Press out and turn RCE H MENU ns main menu Press to select: io FM, AM

CD CD changer (option)

8. SCAN Automatic station search 9. EXIT Scroll back in the menu 10.Navigation buttons

seek/change station or track 11.CD eject 12.CD slot 13.RND CD random 14.FM Shortcut between FM1, FM2, FM3 15.AM Shortcut between AM1, AM2 16.CD Shortcut

10 Infotainment system

208

Over

10

1. POW VOL

2. 1-6 CD c

3. BAS 4. TRE 5. BAL 6. FAD 7. SOU

PUS Ope Turn Rad

17.FM Shortcut between FM1, FM2, FM3 18.AM Shortcut between AM1, AM2 19.CD Shortcut 20.AUTO Automatic station preset 21.Display

view HU-850

ER (On/Off) Press UME Turn Station setting buttons/selecting hanger position S Press out and turn BLE Press out and turn ANCE Press out and turn ER Press out and turn RCE H MENU ns main menu Press to select: io FM, AM

CD CD changer (option)

8. SCAN Automatic station search 9. EXIT Scroll back in the menu 10.Navigation buttons

seek/change station or track 11.CD eject 12.Dolby Surround Pro Logic II 13.OFF 2-channel stereo 14.3-CH 3-channel stereo 15.CD slot 16.RND CD random

10 Infotainment system

209

Audio functions HU-450/650/850

10

control i you hav or decre

Low ba If batter combine gy econ off the r the engi

AUX

Input for external audio source (AUX) 3.5 mm

The AUX input can be used for connecting an MP3 player for example.

Sometimes the AUX external audio source can be heard at a different volume to the in- ternal audio sources, e.g. the CD player. If the audio volume of the external audio source is too high then the sound quality may be impaired. Prevent this by adjusting the in- put volume of the AUX input.

On/Off switch Press the knob to turn on or switch off the radio.

Volume control Turn the knob clockwise to increase volume. Volume

s electronic and lacks an end stop. If e a steering wheel keypad, increase ase volume with (+) or () buttons.

ttery voltage y voltage is low, a text appears in the d instrument unit display. The ener-

omy function of the car may switch adio. Charge the battery by starting ne.

Volume control TP/PTY/NEWS If a cassette or CD is playing when the radio receives a traffic bulletin, news or selected programme type, the function is interrupted and the bulletin or message is broadcast with the volume selected for traffic information, news or programme type.

When the bulletin or message is finished, the unit immediately returns to the previously set volume and resumes playing the cassette or CD.

The audio system can be equipped with dif- ferent options and different versions. There are three audio system versions:

Performance High Performance Premium Sound. FM and AM radio with RDS and CD player is however included in each version.

10 Infotainment system

210

Audi

10

Volume Press

MEN Press

TING

Press LEVE

In this m turning S

Balance right/left Adjust balance by pressing and pulling out the knob and turning it left or right. The balance is «normalised» in the centre position. Press the knob back into its origi- nal position after adjust-

ment.

Selecting the sound source There are two ways to se- lect sound source:

Either with the shortcut keys AM, FM, TAPE or with the SOURCE knob. Turn the SOURCE knob to select

between radio settings (FM1, FM2, FM3 and AM1, AM2). If a cassette player or CD chang- er (option) is connected, it can also be select- ed with the knob.

Press the AM and FM but- ton repeatedly to toggle be- tween FM1, FM2, FM3 and AM1, AM2.

The selected sound source is shown in the display.

o functions HU-450

control AUX SOURCE, turn to ADVANCED

U and select by pressing SOURCE. SOURCE, turn to AUDIO SET- S and select by pressing SOURCE. SOURCE, turn to AUX INPUT L and select by pressing SOURCE. ode the volume can be adjusted by OURCE.

Bass Adjust the bass by press- ing out the knob and turn- ing it to the left or right.

The bass is «normalised» in the centre position. Press the knob back into its origi-

nal position after adjustment.

Treble Adjust the treble by press- ing the knob, pulling it out farther and turning it to the left or right. The treble is «normalised» in the centre position. Press the knob back into its original posi-

tion after adjustment.

Fader Balance front/rear Set a suitable balance be- tween the front and rear speakers by pressing the knob and turning it right (more sound from front pair) or left (more sound from rear pair). The balance is

«normalised» in the centre position. Press the knob back into its original position after ad- justment.

10 Infotainment system

211

Audio functions HU-650/850

10

Bass

Adjust th turning i

The bas tion. Pre sition af

Treble Adjust t turning i «normal knob ba justmen

Selecting the sound source There are two ways to se- lect sound source:

Either with the shortcut keys AM, FM, TAPE or with the SOURCE knob.

Turn the SOURCE knob to select between radio settings (FM1, FM2, FM3 and AM1, AM2). If a cassette player or CD changer (option) is connected, it can also be selected with the knob.

3Press the AM and FM but- ton repeatedly to toggle be- tween FM1, FM2, FM3 and AM1, AM2.

The selected sound source is shown in the display.

e bass by pressing out the knob and t to the left or right.

s is «normalised» in the centre posi- ss the knob back into its original po- ter adjustment.

he treble by pressing the knob and t to the left or right. The treble is ised» in the centre position. Press the ck into its original position after ad- t.

Balance right/left Adjust balance by pressing the knob and turning it left or right. The balance is «normal- ised» in the centre position. Press the knob back into its original position after adjust- ment.

Fader Balance front/rear Set a suitable balance between the front and rear speakers by pressing the knob and turn- ing it right (more sound from front pair) or left (more sound from rear pair). The balance is «normalised» in the centre position. Press the knob back into its original position after ad- justment.

10 Infotainment system

212

Radi

10

Scanni

SCAN o

Tuning Press quencie dible sta ton agai

Manua Press an the disp sired dir few sec desired

The freq ly press Manual five sec

o functions HU-450/650/850

ng Press the SCAN button to start the search. When the radio finds a station, it stops there for about 10 seconds and then con- tinues its search. To listen to the station, press the

r EXIT button.

or to seek lower or higher fre- s. The radio searches for the next au- tion and then stops. Press the but- n to continue the search.

l tuning d hold or . MAN is shown in

lay. The radio slowly scrolls in the de- ection, increasing its tempo after a onds. Release the button when the frequency appears in the display.

uency can then be adjusted by brief- ing one of the arrow keys or . adjusting mode remains available for onds after the last press.

Steering wheel keypad If you have a keypad in the steering wheel, press the right or left arrow to select preset stations.

Switch off the phone by pressing . If there is no SIM card in the phone, switch it off, see page 206.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with an integrated phone, the steering wheel keypad cannot be used for radio functions while the phone is in active mode. Phone information is con- tinuously displayed while the phone is in ac- tive mode.

10 Infotainment system

213

Radio functions HU-450

10

Progra

Set th Briefl Selec

back Press ag and stat

Preset

Autosto

radio sta

1. Sele butto

Start AUTO

mming stations

e desired frequency. y press the PRESET/CD knob. t a number by turning forward or

. ain to store the desired frequency

ion.

To select a preset radio programme, turn the PRESET/CD knob to the stored number. The preset programme is shown in the display.

ring stations This function automatically seeks and stores up to 10 strong AM or FM sta- tions in a separate memo- ry. The function is especial- ly useful in areas in which you are unfamiliar with the

tions or their frequencies.

ct radio mode using the FM or AM n.

the search by pressing and holding (more than 2 seconds).

AUTO is shown in the display and a number of strong stations (max. 10) from the set frequency band are saved in the autostore memory. If there are no stations with sufficient signal strength, NO STATION is displayed.

Briefly press the AUTO button or one of the arrows of the steering wheel keypad to scroll to another of the automatically pre- set stations.

AUTO is shown in the display when the radio is in Autostore mode. The text disappears when you return to normal Radio mode.

Returning to normal Radio mode Press FM, AM or EXIT or turn the

PRESET/CD knob. Returning to Autostore mode Briefly press AUTO.

10 Infotainment system

214

Radi

10

Storing

To store

Set th Press

butto The s STAT play.

Up to 6 AM1, AM 30 statio

Returning to Autostore mode Briefly press AUTO.

o functions HU-650/850

stations

stations on the preset buttons 1-6:

e desired station. and hold the desired station storage n. ound mutes a few seconds. ION STORED is shown in the dis-

stations each can be stored under 2, FM1, FM2 and FM3, a total of ns.

Autostoring stations AUTO seeks and stores up to ten strong AM or FM sta- tions in a separate memo- ry. If more than ten stations are found, the ten strong- est are selected. This func- tion is particularly useful ar-

eas in which you are unfamiliar with the radio stations and their frequencies.

Select radio mode using the AM or FM button.

Start the search by pressing and holding AUTO (more than 2 seconds).

AUTO is shown in the display and a number of strong stations (max. 10) from the set fre- quency band are saved in the Autostore memory. If there are no stations with suffi- cient signal strength, then NO STATION is displayed.

Briefly press the AUTO button or one of the arrows of the steering wheel keypad to scroll to another of the automatically pre- set stations.

AUTO is shown in the display when the radio is in Autostore mode. The text disappears when you return to normal Radio mode.

Returning to normal Radio mode Press the FM, AM or EXIT button.

10 Infotainment system

215

Radio functions HU-450/650/850

10

Radio D

RDS is a network to tune t spective source ( used for finding b text is a tion can about th broadca

Some ra use a lim

PI seek station When lis informat stored in

When a lected, t RDS info ary or ju the radio possible

If there i quiets a play unt

Activate traffic information from a special channel Select radio mode using the FM button. Activate the station from which traffic in-

formation is to be received. Press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select TP STATION and

press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select SET CURRENT and

press SOURCE. Press EXIT.

Deactivating TP Station Select radio mode using the FM button

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select TP STATION and

press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select TP STATION OFF

and press SOURCE. Press EXIT.

ata System RDS

system that links together specific transmitters. It is used, for example, he correct frequency of a station irre- of the transmitter or the active audio e.g. CD). The system can also be receiving traffic information and for roadcasts of a specific type. Radio

lso a component of RDS. A radio sta- , for example, transmit information e radio programme currently being st.

dio stations do not use RDS or only ited range of its features.

(automatic search for s) tening to an RDS transmitter, various ion, such as traffic information, is the radio.

preset RDS transmitter is later se- he radio updates the transmitters rmation. If the radio is at the bound-

st outside of the transmitters range, automatically seeks the strongest transmitter of that channel.

s no audible transmitter, the radio nd the PI SEEK appears in the dis- il the station is found.

Traffic information TP station Traffic information from RDS stations inter- rupts other sound sources. The message is heard at the volume set for this specific fea- ture. As soon as the message ends, the au- dio system returns to the previous sound source and volume setting.

Activating traffic information Select radio mode using the FM button

and press SOURCE. Select TP and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select TP ON (flashing

text) and press SOURCE. Press EXIT.

Deactivate TP Select radio mode using the FM button

and press SOURCE. Select TP and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select TP OFF (flashing

text) and press SOURCE. Press EXIT. TP is shown in the display when this function is active.

Press EXIT if you do not wish to listen to a traffic bulletin. However, the TP function re- mains active and the radio waits for the next traffic bulletin.

10 Infotainment system

216

Radi

10

Alarm «Alarm! an alarm is used and cata or an ac

TP sea This fun formatio areas an tion.

Selec and p

Turn and p

Turn and p

Turn press

Turn TP SE press

Press

News Messag news fro sound s cific fea

Interruptions for news from the current station Select radio mode using the FM button. Activate the station from which traffic in-

formation is to be received. Press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS STATION

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select SET CURRENT and

press SOURCE. Press EXIT.

Deactivating News Station Select radio mode using the FM button

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS STATION

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS STN OFF

and press SOURCE. Press EXIT.

o functions HU-450/650/850

» is shown in the radio display when message is broadcast. This function

to warn motorists of major accidents strophes, such as a bridge collapse

cident at a nuclear plant.

rch ction allows you to listen to traffic in- n when travelling between different d countries without selecting a sta-

t radio mode using the FM button ress SOURCE.

SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU ress SOURCE. SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS ress SOURCE. SOURCE, select TP SEARCH and SOURCE. SOURCE, select TP SEARCH ON or ARCH OFF (flashing text) and

SOURCE. EXIT.

es with a programme code (such as m RDS stations) will interrupt other ources at the volume set for this spe- ture. As soon as the news broadcast

is finished, the audio system returns to the previous sound source and volume setting.

Activating News Select radio mode using the FM button

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS and

press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS ON (flashing

text) and press SOURCE. Press EXIT. NEWS appears in the display.

Deactivating News Select radio mode using the FM button

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS and

press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select NEWS OFF (flash-

ing text) and press SOURCE. Press EXIT. NEWS disappears from the display.

Press EXIT if you do not wish to listen to a news broadcast. However, the News func- tion remains active and the radio waits for the next news programme.

10 Infotainment system

217

Radio functions HU-450/650/850

10

Progra Use the various

Selec and p

Turn press

Turn and p

The rad gramme

If you do found b the left o

If the rad selected previous

Not all r

Deactivating Select radio mode using the FM button

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select PTY and

press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select PTY OFF and

press SOURCE. Press EXIT. The PTY symbol disappears from the display and the radio resumes normal mode.

PTY language The PTY function can be used to select the language used in the radio display (English, German, French or Swedish).

Select radio mode using the FM button and press SOURCE.

Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU and press SOURCE.

Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS and press SOURCE.

Turn SOURCE, select PTY LANGUAGE and press SOURCE.

Turn SOURCE, select language and press SOURCE.

Press EXIT.

Progra OFF Current Religion Country Docum Finance Folk mu Leisure Childre

mme type PTY PTY function to select between the programme types.

t radio mode using the FM button ress SOURCE. SOURCE, select PTY and SOURCE. SOURCE, select PTY in the menu ress SOURCE.

io begins seeking the selected pro- type.

not wish to listen to the station y the radio, continue the search using r right arrow key.

io does not find a station with the programme type, it returns to the frequency.

adio stations have a PTY designation.

PTY standby PTY mode is then in standby until the select- ed programme type is broadcast. When this happens, the radio automatically switches to the station broadcasting the selected pro- gramme type.

mme type Display shows PTY OFF

affairs Current Spiritual

music Country entary Document

Finance sic Folk

and hobby Leisure ns progs Childrens progs

Oldies music «Oldies» Information Info Jazz music Jazz Serious classic Classical Culture and Art Culture Light classic L Class Easy listening Easy list National music Nation M News News Pop music Pop Travel and holiday Travel Rock music Rock Social affairs Social Sport Sport Drama Drama Phone In Phone Entertainment Enterta Education Educ Science Science Weather & Metro Weather & Metro Other music Other M

Programme type Display shows

10 Infotainment system

218

Radi

10

Autom The AF f sures th available

Activat Selec

and p Turn

and p Turn

MEN

Turn text)

Press

Deactiv Selec

and p Turn

and p Turn

RADI press

Turn text)

Press

EON Local/Distant (Enhanced Other Networks) When EON is activated, the radio programme is interrupted for traffic bulletins, news broadcasts or the like from other channels.

The function has two levels Local only interrupts if the signal is strong.

Distant also interrupts with weaker signals.

Select radio mode using the FM button and press SOURCE.

Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU and press SOURCE.

Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS MENU and press SOURCE.

Turn SOURCE, select EON (flashing text) and press SOURCE.

Turn SOURCE, select Local or Distant and press SOURCE.

Press EXIT.

Resetting RDS functions Resets all radio settings to the original facto- ry settings.

Select radio mode using the FM button and press SOURCE.

Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU and press SOURCE.

o functions HU-450/650/850

atic frequency updating unction is normally activate and en- at the radio tunes to the strongest transmitter.

ing AF t radio mode using the FM button ress SOURCE.

SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU ress SOURCE. SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS U and press SOURCE. SOURCE, select AF ON (flashing and press SOURCE. EXIT.

ating AF t radio mode using the FM button ress SOURCE.

SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU ress SOURCE. SOURCE, select O SETTINGS MENU and SOURCE. SOURCE, select AF OFF (flashing and press SOURCE. EXIT.

Regional radio programmes The regional function is normally deactivated. When the function is activated you can con- tinue to listen to a regional broadcasts even if the signal is weak.

Activating REG Select radio mode using the FM button

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select

RADIO SETTINGS MENU and press SOURCE.

Turn SOURCE, select REG ON (flashing text) and press SOURCE.

Press EXIT.

Deactivating REG Select radio mode using the FM button

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select RADIO SETTINGS

MENU and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select REG OFF (flashing

text) and press SOURCE. Press EXIT.

10 Infotainment system

219

Radio functions HU-450/650/850

10

Turn RESE press

Press ASC (A The ASC volume

Activat Selec

and p Turn

and p Turn

MEN Turn

press Turn

HIGH Radio t Some R such as ists. Hold the onds to which th After the again di A brief p play.

SOURCE, select T TO DEFAULT and SOURCE. EXIT. ctive Sound Control) function automatically adapts the

of the radio to vehicle speed.

ing ASC: t radio mode using the FM button ress SOURCE.

SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU ress SOURCE. SOURCE, select AUDIO SETTINGS U and press SOURCE. SOURCE, select ASC LEVEL and SOURCE. SOURCE select LOW, MEDIUM, or Off and press SOURCE. ext DS stations broadcast information, about programme content and art-

FM button depressed a few sec- access any transmitted radio text, en appears in the display. text is shown twice, the radio once

splays the station/frequency. ress on EXIT ends the radio text dis-

10 Infotainment system

220

Cass

10

Casset

Insert th part to t display.

When o er autom (auto rev

To play sette pla the TAP

Chang Press th other sid played w

Fast forward/reverse The tape is fast forwarded by pressing and holding and is rewound with . «FF» (fast forward) or «REW» (rewind) is shown in the display during this time.

Press the button again to stop fast forward- ing/rewinding.

Next track Previous track Pressing automatically fast forwards the tape to the next track.

Pressing automatically rewinds the tape to the previous track. For this function to be operational, there must be a five second pause between tracks.

If the car is equipped with a steering wheel keypad, the arrows can also be used.

ette player HU-450

te opening

e cassette in the slot with the wider he right. TAPE Side A appears in the

ne side is finished, the cassette play- atically plays back the other side erse).

a cassette that is already in the cas- yer, turn the SOURCE knob or press E shortcut key.

ing tape direction e REV button in order to play the e of the cassette; the side being ill be shown in the display.

Cassette eject If you press the button, the tape stops and the cassette is ejected. Turn the SOURCE knob to select a new programme source. The cassette can be insert- ed or ejected even if the

system is switched off.

Dolby B Noise Reduction This is a preset function which can be switched off as follows: press and hold the REV button until the Dolby symbol disap- pears from the display. Press the same button again in order to reactivate the Dolby function.

Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured un- der license of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labora- tories Licensing Corporation.

Scanning Scan plays the first ten sec- onds of each track.

Press the SCAN or EXIT button when you find a track you wish to listen to.

10 Infotainment system

221

CD player HU-650

10

CD pla

Insert a player, a knob or

CD eje

CD discs Using CD discs burned at home could result in poor or non-existent sound. Music CD discs complying with the ISO 60908 stan- dard provide the best sound quality.

NO

For rea twelve Otherw player played

IMPORTANT

Only use standard discs (12 cm in diame- ter). Do not use CDs with that have disc la- bels. The heat from the CD player could cause the label to come loose from the disc. The CD player could then be damaged.

yer CD. If there is already a CD in the ctivate it by turning the SOURCE

pressing the CD shortcut key.

ct If you press the button shown in the illustration, the CD player stops playing and the disc is ejected.

Fast forward/reverse and change track

Press and hold down the right or left-hand arrow key to fast forward/reverse a track or the whole disc. Fast forward/reversing can- not be done using the steering wheel keypad.

Briefly press the left or right-hand arrow key to go to the previous or next track. The steer- ing wheel keypad can also be used for this. Track numbers are shown in the display.

Scanning Scan plays the first ten seconds of each track.

Press the SCAN or EXIT button when you find a track you wish to listen to.

Random Press RND (random) to connect the random func- tion. The system plays tracks from the disc in ran- dom order. «RND» is dis- played as long as this func- tion is activated.

TE

sons of traffic safety, you have seconds to handle the ejected disc. ise, the CD is drawn back into the

and resumes with the most recently track.

10 Infotainment system

222

Inter

10

Interna

HU-850 changer the SOU The CD ly played

Up to 6 er. An e lected w selectin tion is s «LOAD new dis

CD eje

Random Press RND (random) to connect the random func- tion. A randomly selected disc plays a randomly se- lected track. A new disc and track are then chosen the same way. «RND» is

displayed as long as this function is activated.

CD discs Using CD discs burned at home could result in poor or non-existent sound. Music CD discs complying with the ISO 60908 stan- dard provide the best sound quality.

NO

For rea twelve Otherw player played

IMPORTANT

Only use standard discs (12 cm in diame- ter). Do not use CDs with that have disc la- bels. The heat from the CD player could cause the label to come loose from the disc. The CD player could then be damaged.

nal CD changer HU-850

l CD changer

contains an internal 6-disc CD . Press the CD shortcut key or turn RCE knob to activate the CD player. player resumes with the most recent- CD.

discs can be inserted in the CD play- mpty slot in the player must be se- hen inserting a disc. This is done by

g from buttons 1-6. An available posi- hown in the display. Make sure DISC» is shown before inserting a c.

ct If you press the button shown in the illustration, the CD player stops playing and the disc is ejected.

Selecting disc number Use buttons 1-6 to select which disc is to be played. The disc and track numbers are shown in the display.

Fast forward/reverse and change track

Press and hold down the right or left-hand arrow key to fast forward/reverse a track or the whole disc. Fast forward/reversing can- not be done using the steering wheel keypad.

Briefly press the left or right-hand arrow key to go to the previous or next track. The steer- ing wheel keypad can also be used for this. Track numbers are shown in the display.

Scanning Scan plays the first ten seconds of each track.

Press the SCAN or EXIT button when you find a track you wish to listen to.TE

sons of traffic safety, you have seconds to handle the ejected disc. ise, the CD is drawn back into the

and resumes with the most recently track.

10 Infotainment system

223

changer HU-450/650/850 (option)

10

CD cha

The exte the pane cargo ar

Activate SOURC playing track. If «LOAD display.

Loadin Slide Press

chan

Random Press RND (HU-650 and 850) to activate the Ran- dom function. For radio HU-450, it is activated with the REV button.

A randomly selected track is played from a randomly selected disc. A new track or disc is then selected the same way. «RND» is displayed while this function is active.

CD discs Using CD discs burned at home could result in poor or non-existent sound. Music CD discs complying with the ISO 60908 stan- dard provide the best sound quality.

IMPORTANT

Only use standard discs (12 cm in diame- ter). Do not use CDs with that have disc la- bels. The heat from the CD player could cause the label to come loose from the disc. The CD player could then be damaged.

External CD

nger

rnal CD changer is mounted behind l on the rear left-hand side of the ea.

the CD changer mode by turning the E knob; the CD changer resumes the most recently played disc and the CD player cartridge* is empty, CARTRIDGE» will be shown in the

g discs in the CD changer open the CD changer cover the cartridge eject button on the

ger.

Pull out the CD cartridge and insert the discs.

2. Reinsert the cartridge in the CD chang- er.

Selecting discs Select which disc is to be played by turning the PRESET/CD knob (HU-450) or using but- tons 1-6 (HU-650/850). The disc and track numbers are shown in the display.

Fast forward/reverse and change track

Press and hold down the right or left-hand arrow key to fast forward/reverse a track or the whole disc. Fast forward/reversing can- not be done using the steering wheel keypad.

Briefly press the left or right-hand arrow key to go to the previous or next track. The steer- ing wheel keypad can also be used for this. Track numbers are shown in the display.

Scanning Scan plays the first ten seconds of each track.

Press the SCAN or EXIT button when you find a track you wish to listen to.

10 Infotainment system

224

Dolb

10

Genera Dolby S finemen vides a ence. Th able to r

Dolby S centre s sound e

The nor vided in round so ers. Dol mode.

3-chann AM and

Dolby S tradema Corpora System Licensin

Surround Level This function is used to set the output level of the rear channels.

Press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select AUDIO SETTINGS

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select

SURROUND LEVEL and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select level and

press SOURCE. Press EXIT.

Mid EQ Level This function is used to fine-tune the sound from the speakers.

Press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select AUDIO SETTINGS

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select MID EQ LEVEL and

press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select level and

press SOURCE. Press EXIT.

y Surround Pro Logic II HU-850

l urround Pro Logic II is a further re- t of the previous system and pro- significantly improved sound experi- is improvement is especially notice- ear seat passengers.

urround Pro Logic II together with a peaker in the dashboard offers a xperience very close to being there.

mal left-right stereo channels are di- to left-centre-right. In addition, sur- und is produced by the rear speak-

by Surround Pro Logic II works in CD

el stereo (3-CH) is recommended for FM radio transmissions.

urround Pro Logic II is a registered rk of Dolby Laboratories Licensing tion. Dolby Pro Logic II Surround is licensed from Dolby Laboratories g Corporation.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II Mode To select Dolby Surround Pro Logic II Mode, press » PL II«. » PL II» is shown in the display. Press OFF to return to 2-channel stereo.

3-channel stereo Select 3-channel stereo by pressing 3-CH. «3 ch» will be shown in the display. Resume 2-channel stereo function by pressing OFF.

Centre Level This function is used to set the level of the centre channel.

Press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select ADVANCED MENU

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select AUDIO SETTINGS

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select CENTRE LEVEL

and press SOURCE. Turn SOURCE, select level and

press SOURCE. Press EXIT.

10 Infotainment system

225

Technical data

10HU-850 Output 25 W (centre loudspeaker) Impeda Operati Externa 4 x 50 W or 4 x 75 W1

Radio Frequen U (FM) M (AM) L (AM)

1HU-85

HU-450 HU-650 4 x 25 W 4 x 25 W 1 x

nce 4 Ohm ng voltage 12 V, negative ground l amplifier 4 x 50 W or 4 x 75 W (option)

cy 87.5 108 MHz 522 1611 kHz 153 279 kHz

0 must be connected to an external amplifier.

10 Infotainment system

226

Phon

10

Phone sy

e functions (option)

stem components

10 Infotainment system

227

Phone functions (option)

10

Genera Put tr

requi armre

Switc Switc

ing w Only

your

Emerg Emerge be made card.

Press Ring

to yo Press

5. SIM card The SIM card is inserted below the keypad in the centre console.

Switch off the phone whenever a SIM card is not in use. Otherwise, messages from other functions cannot be shown in the display.

6. Microphone The microphone is integrated in the rearview mirror.

7. Loudspeaker The speaker is integrated in the drivers seat head restraint.

8. Antenna The antenna is mounted against the wind- screen in front of the rearview mirror.

l rules affic safety first! If when driving you re to use the privacy handset in the st, park the car in a safe place first. h off the phone when refuelling. h off the phone in areas where blast- ork is being carried out. allow authorised personnel service phone.

ency calls ncy calls to emergency services can without the ignition key or the SIM

the On/Off button. the emergency number that applies ur region (within EU: 112). the green button .

Phone system components

1. Keypad on centre console All phone functions can be controlled via the keypad in the centre console.

2. Steering wheel keypad The majority of phone functions can be con- trolled via the steering wheel keypad.

When the phone is active, the keypad can only be used for phone functions. Phone in- formation is always shown in the display when the phone is activated. The phone must be deactivated in order to use the but- tons for radio settings, see page 228.

3. Display The display will show menu functions, mes- sages, phone numbers, etc.

4. Privacy handset The privacy handset can be used for private conversations when you do not wish to be disturbed.

10 Infotainment system

228

Phon

10

SIM ca

The pho card (Su work op

Always the nam displaye

Switch o not in us function controls be used

Active mode The phone must be in active mode for its functions to be available for use (does not apply to receiving calls). Activate the phone by pressing in the keypad in the centre console or in the steering wheel keypad.

Phone information is shown continuously in the display when the phone is activated.

Press to deactivate the phone.

e functions (option)

rd

ne can only be used with a valid SIM bscriber Identity Module). Your net- erator supplies this card.

use the SIM card during phone use; e of your network operator will be d.

ff the phone whenever a SIM card is e. Otherwise, messages from other s cannot be displayed and the radio in the steering wheel keypad cannot .

Switching the phone on and off

To switch the phone on Turn the ignition key to position I. Press the button marked in the illustration.

To switch the phone off Press the same button for three seconds. If you switch off the cars ignition while the phone is switched on, it will be on the next time you switch on the ignition.

Phone calls cannot be received if the phone is switched off.

10 Infotainment system

229

Call options

10

Display

The disp example number

Making

To dial Dial the ing whe handset

To rece Press use Auto function

Privacy handset

If you wish to talk undisturbed, use the priva- cy handset. Lift the handset. Dial the number on the centre console

keypad. Press to dial. Adjust the volume with the dial on the side of the handset. The call is ended when you re- place the handset in its holder.

If you wish to switch to handsfree without ending the call Press and select Handsfree. Press and put the handset down, see

page 229.

lay will show the function in use, for menu selections, messages, phone

s or settings.

and receiving calls

number and press on the steer- el or centre console keypad (or lift the ).

ive an incoming call (or lift the handset). You can also

matic Answer. See menu 4.3.

The car audio system will be muted automat- ically while a phone conversation is in progress. Refer to menu function 5.6.5 on page 238 for information about audio system volume levels.

Ending a call To end a call, press on one of the key- pads or hang up the handset. The audio sys- tem resumes its previous mode.

Last dialled numbers The phone automatically stores the last phone numbers/names called.

Press on the steering wheel or centre console keypad.

Use the arrows to scroll forward or backward through the last numbers dialled.

Press (or lift the privacy handset) to make the call.

10 Infotainment system

230

Call

10

Speed

Storing A numb linked to

Scrol and p

Scrol press

Choo dial n

Find t the m

Using s Press th about tw

The following functions are available when you have a current call and a parked call:

Scroll with the arrows and press YES to make a selection.

The following functions are available when you have selected Three-way calling and have two calls in progress:

Scroll with the arrows and press YES to make a selection.

NO

Once y ment b use a s activat

Secret mode/ Secret mode off

Secret mode

Handset/Handsfree Use the handset or handsfree

Memory Show stored numbers

Three-way calling Speak with both parties simultane- ously (conference call)

Switch Switch between the two calls

Secret mode/ Secret mode off

Secret mode

Handset/Handsfree Use the handset or handsfree

Memory Show stored numbers

options

dial

speed dial numbers er stored in the phone book can be a speed dial button (1-9) as follows:

l with to Edit memory (menu 3) ress . l to Speed dial (Menu 3.4) and . se the digit that is to be the speed umber. Press to confirm. he desired name or phone number in emory and press to select it.

peed dial e desired speed dial button for o seconds to make a call.

Functions during a call The following functions are available during a call:

Scroll with the arrows and press YES to make a selection.

TE

ou switch on the phone, wait a mo- efore using speed dial. If you wish to peed dial number, Menu 4.5 must be ed, see page 217.

Secret mode/ Secret mode off

Secret mode

Hold/Dont hold Choose whether or not the call is to be put on hold

Handset/Handsfree Use the handset or handsfree

Memory Show stored numbers

10 Infotainment system

231

Call options

10

Call wa If you he phone is signal, a phone. T you ans this occ call.

If you do or do no press «park m be term

SMS A single have rec

Volume Raise th steering with the

When th wheel k tions.

If you w these bu phone, s

iting ar a tone in the speaker when the engaged followed by a two-tone nother party is placing a call to your he two-tone signal will repeat until

wer the call or ringing ceases. When urs, you may accept or decline the

not wish to take the call, press thing. If you do wish to take the call,

. Your current call will be put in ode». If you press , both calls will inated.

two-tone signal indicates that you eived an SMS message.

e volume with the (+) button in the wheel keypad. Lower the volume () button.

e phone is activated, the steering eypad only controls the phone func-

ish to adjust radio settings using ttons you must first deactivate the ee page 228.

10 Infotainment system

232

Mem

10

Storing

Phone n either th memory

When yo whose n name w

The pho 255 nam

Storing

Press (Men

Scrol

Enter

Enter

Choo and p

space 1- ? ! , . : ‘ ( )

a b c 2

d e f 3

g h i 4

j k l 5

m n o 6

p q r s 7

t u v 8

w x y z 9

if you enter two letters in a row from the same button, press * between them or wait a few seconds + 0 @ * # & $ / %

change between capital and lower case letters delete the last letter or number entered. If you press for a long time, the enter number or text is deleted.

ory functions

in the memory

umbers and names can be stored in e phone memory or the SIM card .

u accept a phone call from a party umber is stored in the memory, their ill be shown in the display.

ne memory can store up to es.

phone numbers with names

and toggle to Edit memory u 3). Press .

l to Add (Menu 3.1) and press .

a number and press .

a name and press .

se in which memory to save with ress .

Enter a name (or message) Press the button with the desired character: once for the first character, twice for the sec- ond, etc. Press 1 to enter a space.

10 Infotainment system

233

Memory functions

10

Dialling Press

steer Choose

Press steer the a name

Press (or en

Press

from the memory in the centre console or in the

ing wheel keypad. from the following alternatives:

in the centre console or in the ing wheel keypad and browse with rrows until you locate the required . the key of the first letter in the name ter the name) and press . to dial the selected number.

10 Infotainment system

234

Menu

10

Menu f

Use the tions, ch new fun menu se

Press

The follo

A lon menu

A sho retrac

A pre selec to the

The r menu

The le side m

Shortc The men selected and play tog

Traffic For reas not be a 8 km/h.

Main menus/submenus

1. Call register 1.1. Missed calls 1.2. Received calls 1.3. Dialled calls 1.4. Erase list

1.4.1. All 1.4.2. Missed 1.4.3. Received 1.4.4. Dialled

1.5. Call duration 1.5.1. Last call 1.5.2. Number of calls 1.5.3. Total time 1.5.4. Clear

2. Messages 2.1. Read 2.2. Write 2.3. Voice message 2.4. Settings

2.4.1. SMSC number 2.4.2. Validity 2.4.3. Type

functions

unction

menu function when checking func- anging settings and programming

ctions in your system. The various lections will be shown in the display.

to access the menu function.

wing applies in the menu function:

g press on means you exit the function. rt press on means that you t, cancel or reject an alternative. ss on means that you confirm or t, or that you scroll from a submenu next submenu.

ight arrow leads to the next side . ft arrow leads to the previous enu.

uts u options are numbered and can be directly using the number keys . The numbers are shown in the dis- ether with the menu option.

safety ons of safety, the menu system can- ccessed at speeds in excess of You may only complete activities in

the menu system that have already been started.

The speed limiter can be disconnected using menu function 5.7.

10 Infotainment system

235

Menu functions

10

3. Edit 3.1. 3.2.

3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2

3.3. 3.3 3.3

3.4. 3.5. 3.6. 3.7.

4. Call 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 4.6.

4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6 4.6

5.6.2. Ring signal 5.6.3. Button click 5.6.4. Speed volume 5.6.5. Radio Auto Suppression 5.6.6. New SMS

5.7. Traffic safety

memory Enter item Search .1. Edit .2. Erase .3. Copy .4. Move Copy all .1. SIM to phone .2. Phone to SIM Speed dial Empty SIM Empty memory Status

options Transmit number Call waiting Automatic answer Automatic redial Speed dial Call divert service .1. All calls .2. When busy .3. When not answered .4. Not available .5. Fax calls .6. Data calls

4.6.7. Cancel all diverts

5. Settings 5.1. Factory settings 5.2. Network selection 5.3. Language

5.3.1. English UK 5.3.2. English US 5.3.3. Svenska 5.3.4. Dansk 5.3.5. Suomi 5.3.6. Deutsch 5.3.7. Nederlands 5.3.8. Franais FR 5.3.9. Franais CAN 5.3.10. Italiano 5.3.11. Espaol 5.3.12. Portugus P 5.3.13. Portugus BR

5.4. SIM security 5.4.1. On 5.4.2. Off 5.4.3. AUTO

5.5. Change codes 5.5.1. PIN code 5.5.2. Phone code

5.6. Volume 5.6.1. Ringer volume

10 Infotainment system

236

Menu

10

Menu o

1. Call 1.1.

A list of choose the phon

1.2. A list of choose the phon

1.3. A list of can cho in the ph use.

1.4. This opt menus 1

1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4

1.5. Here yo or the m number

1.5

3. Edit memory 3.1. Enter item

You can store names and phone numbers in the phone or SIM card memory. See the sec- tion on memory functions for more informa- tion.

3.2. Search Changes in the memory can be made here.

3.2.1. Edit: Change data in the different memories.

3.2.2. Erase: Remove a saved name.

3.2.3. Copy: Copy a saved name. 3.2.4. Move: Transfer information

between the memory of the phone and the SIM card.

3.3. Copy all: Copy phone numbers and names from the SIM card to the phone memory.

3.3.1. From SIM to phone memory

3.3.2. From phone to SIM memory

3.4. Speed dial A number stored in the phone book can be stored as a speed dial number.

functions

ptions, description

register Missed calls

missed calls is shown here. You can to call, erase or store the number in e or SIM card memory for later use.

Received calls received calls is shown here. You can to call, erase or store the number in e or SIM card memory for later use.

Dialled calls dialled numbers is shown here. You ose to call, erase or store the number one or SIM card memory for later

Erase list ion can be used to erase the list of .1, 1.2 and 1.3 as follows.

.1. All

.2. Missed

.3. Received

.4. Dialled Call duration

u can see the duration of all your calls ost recent. You can also see the of calls and clear the call timer.

.1. Last call

1.5.2. Number of calls 1.5.3. Total time 1.5.4. Clear

Resetting the call timer requires the phone code (see Menu 5.5).

2. Messages 2.1. Read

Here you can read received text messages. You can then choose to erase the message, forward it, change or save the entire mes- sage or parts of it.

2.2. Write You can write a text message using the key- pad. Then choose to save or send it.

2.3. Voice message Listen to received messages.

2.4. Settings Enter the number (SMSC number) of the message centre to which you want your mes- sages transferred. Specify how the message is to reach the addressee and how long it is to be stored in the message centre.

2.4.1. SMSC number 2.4.2. Validity 2.4.3. Type

Contact your service provider for information on these settings and for an SMSC number.

10 Infotainment system

237

Menu functions

10

3.5. The enti erased.

3.6. The enti erased.

3.7. See how phone m number

4. Call 4.1.

Select w should b Contact perman

4.2. Choose ed durin call com

4.3. Chose t

4.4. Choose that was

5.3. Language Here you can choose which language the phone is to display.

5.3.1. English UK 5.3.2. English US 5.3.3. Svenska 5.3.4. Dansk 5.3.5. Suomi 5.3.6. Deutsch 5.3.7. Nederlands 5.3.8. Franais FR 5.3.9. Franais CAN 5.3.10. Italiano 5.3.11. Espaol 5.3.12. Portugus P 5.3.13. Portugus BR

5.4. SIM security Choose if the PIN code is to be on, off, or au- tomatic.

5.4.1. On 5.4.2. Off 5.4.3. AUTO

5.5. Change codes Change the PIN code or phone code.

5.5.1. PIN code

Empty SIM re memory of the SIM card can be

Empty memory re memory of the phone can be

Status many places in the SIM card or emory are occupied by names and

s.

options Transmit number

hether or not your own number e displayed to the person you call.

your network operator regarding ently withheld numbers.

Call waiting whether or not you want to be alert- g a phone call that there is another ing in.

Automatic answer o answer without using the keypad.

Automatic redial to call a previously dialled number busy.

4.5. Speed dial Here you set whether or not speed dial is to be active. The function must be activated if you wish to dial using speed dial numbers.

4.6. Diversions Here you can choose when and what type of calls are to be diverted to a specified phone number.

4.6.1. All calls (this setting only applies during the call in progress).

4.6.2. When busy 4.6.3. When not answered 4.6.4. Not available 4.6.5. Fax calls 4.6.6. Data calls 4.6.7. Cancel all diverts

5. Settings 5.1. Factory settings

Function to return to the systems factory settings.

5.2. Network selection Choose a network automatically or manually.

5.2.1. AUTO 5.2.2. Manual

10 Infotainment system

238

Menu

10

5.5

5.6. 5.6

5.6

5.6 5.6

5.6

NO

Make a place.

functions

.2. Phone code (use 1234 until you change to your own code). The phone code is used to reset the call timer.

Volume .1. Ringer volume: Here you

can choose the volume of the ringer for incoming calls.

.2. Ring signal: You have eight different types of ring signals to choose from.

.3. Button click: On or Off.

.4. Speed volume: Choose whether the volume should be adjusted according to speed.

.5. Radio Auto Suppression: Here you choose whether or not the volume of the radio should remain the same during phone calls.

5.6.6. New SMS: Select whether or not you wish the phone to notify of new SMS messages with an audible signal.

5.7. Traffic safety Here you can choose to disengage the speed limiter for the menu system, i.e. choose to use the menu system even while driving.

TE

note of your code as save it in a safe

10 Infotainment system

239

Miscellaneous information

10

Radio/

The four keypad phone.

The pho adjust th tons, se

If you w these bu phone.

Press

Specifications

IMEI number To block the phone, you must provide your network operator with the phones IMEI number. This is a 15-digit serial number that is programmed in the phone.

Dial *#06# to show this number in the display.

Make a note of this number and keep it in a safe place.

Output 2 W SIM card Small Memory entries 2551

1The phone memory contains 255 positions. The number of SIM card memory positions varies depending on your subscription.

SMS (Short Message Service)

Yes

Data/Fax No Dualband Yes (900/1800)

Phone

lower buttons on the steering wheel are common to the audio system and

ne must be in active mode in order to e phone functions with these but-

e page 228.

ish to adjust radio settings using ttons you must first deactivate the

.

Double SIM cards

Many network operators offer double SIM cards — one for your car and one for another phone. A double SIM card allows you to have the same number for two different phones.

Ask your network operator about the options available and the use of double SIM cards.

240

Type designation …………………………………………………………………………242 Dimensions and weights ……………………………………………………………..243 Engine specifications …………………………………………………………………..244 Engine oil ……………………………………………………………………………………246 Fluids and lubricants ……………………………………………………………………249 Fuel ……………………………………………………………………………………………250 Catalytic converter ………………………………………………………………………253 Electrical system …………………………………………………………………………254

11 Specifications

242

Type

11

wing the cars type designation, vehicle tification and engine numbers can facili- all contact with a Volvo dealer regarding car and when ordering spare parts and ssories.

ype designation, vehicle identification umber, maximum permissible weights, odes for colour and upholstery and type pproval number. ecal for parking heater. ngine type designation, component nd serial number. he engine oil decal (certain engine ariants) specifies oil grade and viscos-

ty. earbox type designation and serial umber. : Manual gearbox. : Automatic gearbox AW. IN number (type and model year des-

gnation plus chassis number)

designation

Kno iden tate the acce

1. T n c a

2. D 3. E

a 4. T

v i

5. G n a b

6. V i

11 Specifications

243

Dimensions and weights

11

Dimens

Weight Kerb we the fuel fluids, s

The wei such as etc. and hitched, and mus

Permitte Gross v

Only for China

1. Max. total weight 2. Max. trailer weight Maximum load: See registration document.

Maximum roof load: 100 kg

Trailer with brakes:

Trailer without brakes

Length Width Height Wheelb Front tr Rear tr

W

The ca pendin the loa

Maximum trailer weight (kg)

Maximum towball load

(kg)

0-1200 50 1201-1600 75

Maximum trailer weight kg

Maximum towball load

kg

750 50

ions (cm)

s ight includes the driver, the weight of tank when filled to 90 % and various uch as washer fluid and coolant.

ght of passengers and accessories, a towbar, load carriers, space box towball load (when a trailer is see table), influences the payload t not be included in the kerb weight.

d weight (in addition to driver) = ehicle weight Kerb weight.

1. Max. total weight 2. Max. train weight (car+trailer) 3. Max. front axle load 4. Max. rear axle load

460 (R: 461) 180 143

ase 272 ack 156 ack 156

ARNING

rs driving characteristics change de- g on how heavily it is loaded and how d is distributed.

11 Specifications

244

Engin

11

Engine t rial num page 24

.0T 2.5T 2.4T

Engine 204T5 B5254T2 B52 44T41

Output 2/5500 154/5000 162/5500 (hp/rpm 0/5500 210/5000 220/5500 Torque 600-5000 320/1500-4500 350/2100-4000 No. of c 5 5 5 Bore (m 81 83 81 Stroke 77 93.2 93.2 Swept 1.98 2.52 2.4 Compr .5:1 9.0:1 8.5:1

1 Thailan

e specifications

ype designation, component and se- ber can be read on the engine, see 2.

2.4 BIFUEL (CNG) 2.4 2

designation B5244S2 B5244SG B5244S B5

(kW/rpm) 103/4500 103/5800 125/6000 13 ) 140/4500 140/5800 170/6000 18

(Nm/rpm) 220/3300 192/4500 225/4500 240/2 ylinders 5 5 5 m) 83 83 83

(mm) 90 90 90 volume (litres) 2.44 2.44 2.44 ession ratio 10.3:1 10.3:1 10.3:1 9

d, Malaysia

11 Specifications

245

Engine specifications

11

Engine t rial num page 24

.4D D5

Engine 244T5 D5244T4 Output 0/5500 136/4000 (hp/rpm 3/5500 185/4000 Torque 750-2750 400/2000-2750 No. of c 5 5 Bore (m 81 81 Stroke 93.2 93.2 Swept 2.40 2.40 Compr 7.0:1 17.0:1

ype designation, component and se- ber can be read on the engine, see 2.

T5 R D 2

designation B5244T5 B5254T4 D5244T7 D5 (kW/rpm) 191/5500 220/5500 92/4000 12 ) 260/5500 300/5500 126/4000 16

(Nm/rpm) 350/2100-5000 400/1950-5250 300/1750-2250 340/1 ylinders 5 5 5 m) 81 83 81

(mm) 93.2 93.2 93.2 volume (litres) 2.40 2.52 2.40 ession ratio 8.5:1 8.5:1 17.0:1 1

11 Specifications

246

Engin

11

Advers

Check t journeys

towin in mo at hig in tem

hotte This can ature or

Also che car is of than 10 (below +

Choose verse dr protecti

Volvo re product

Viscosity chart

e oil

e driving conditions

he oil level more frequently for long :

g a caravan or trailer untainous regions h speeds peratures colder than 30 C or

r than +40 C. produce abnormally high oil temper-

oil consumption.

ck the oil level more often if the ten driven short distances (less km) when temperatures are low 5 C).

a fully synthetic engine oil for ad- iving conditions. It provides extra on for the engine.

commends oil s.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the en- gines service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consump- tion and environmental impact. An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, other- wise you will risk affecting service life, start- ing characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warran- ty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

11 Specifications

247

Engine oil

11

Oil dec

Engin

Bi-fuel R

1Includ

al When the oil decal shown alongside here is in the cars engine compartment, the following applies. See location on page 242.

Oil grade: ACEA A1/B1

Viscosity: SAE 5W30

When driving under adverse conditions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.

e variant Volume between MINMAX (litres) Volume1 (litres)

B5244SG 1.2

5.8 B5254T4 5.5

ing filter change.

11 Specifications

248

Engin

11

Oil dec

Engin

2.0T

2.4

2.4T

T5 2.5T

D5 2.4D D

1 Includin 2 Thailan

e oil

al When the oil decal shown alongside here is in the cars engine compartment, the following applies. See location on page 242.

Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 0W30

e variant Volume between MINMAX (litres) Volume1 (litres)

B5204T5

1.2 5.5

B5244S B5244S2

B5244T42

B5244T5 B5254T2

D5244T4

2.0 6.2 D5244T5 D5244T7

g filter change.

d, Malaysia

11 Specifications

249

Fluids and lubricants

11

Fluid il grade

Gearbo TF 97309

S 3309

Coolan n inhibitor mixed with water, see packaging. s opening at: 90 C in petrol engines and ines.

Air con FC134a)

Brake f Power WSS M2C204-A or equivalent product.

Washe eze recommended by Volvo, mixed with water ow freezing.

1 Weights rmation.

IM

The rec be use Do not id. If th differe worksh

System Volume (litres)

Recommended o

x oil Manual 5 speed (M56/M58) 2.1 Transmission fluid MManual 6-speed (M66) 2.0

Automatic gearbox (AW55-50, AW55-51) 7.2 Transmission fluid JWAutomatic gearbox (TF-80SC) 7.0

t Petrol engine without turbo 8.0 Coolant with corrosio The thermostat start at 82 C in diesel eng

Petrol engine with turbo 9.0 Diesel 12.5

ditioning1 Oil: PAG Refrigerant R134a (H

luid 0.6 DOT 4+ steering System:

of which reservoir 0.9 0.2

Power steering fluid:

r fluid without high-pressure washing 4.5 Use a washer antifre for temperatures belwith high-pressure washing 6.4

can vary depending on the engine variant. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the exact info

PORTANT

ommended transmission fluid must d to prevent damage to the gearbox. mix with any other transmission flu- e transmission is topped up with a nt fluid, contact an authorised Volvo op for servicing.

NOTE

Under normal driving conditions the gear- box oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions, see page 246.

11 Specifications

250

Fuel

11

Consu

Engin Emissions of CO2

(g/km) Tank volume

(litres)

2.4 209 70 226

Bi-fuel 208 30 228

2.4 212 70 226

2.0T 212 70 227

2.5T 217 70 234 232 72 244

2.4T 70

T5 220 70 234

R 252 68 259

1 Certain

mption, emissions and volume

e Gearbox Consumption litre/100 km

B5244S2 Manual 5 speed (M56) 8.8 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 9.5

B5244SG Manual 5 speed (M56) 8.7 Automatic gearbox (AW55-50) 9.5

B5244S Manual 5 speed (M56) 8.9 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 9.5

B5204T5 Manual 5 speed (M56) 8.9 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 9.5

B5254T2 Manual 5 speed (M56) 9.1 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 9.8

AWD Manual 5-speed (M58) 9.7 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 10.2

B5244T41

B5244T5 Manual 6-speed (M66) 9.3 Automatic gearbox (AW55-51) 9.8

B5254T4 Manual 6-speed (M66) 10.5 Automatic gearbox (TF-80SC) 10.9

countries

11 Specifications

251

Fuel

11

Engin Emissions of CO2 (g/km)

Tank volume (litres)

D5 199 70 174

2.4D 199 174 169

D 169

e Gearbox Consumption litre/100 km

D5244T4 Automatic gearbox (TF-80SC) 7.5 Manual 6-speed (M66) 6.6

D5244T5 Automatic gearbox (TF-80SC) 7.5 Manual 6-speed (M66) 6.6 Manual 5 speed (M56) 6.4

D5244T7 Manual 5 speed (M56) 6.4

11 Specifications

252

Fuel

11

Fuel co carbon

Official f on a sta with EU sumptio equippe the cars is driven also affe higher a an octan

nsumption and emissions of dioxide

uel consumption figures are based ndard driving cycle in accordance Directive 80/1268 comb. Fuel con- n figures may change if the car is d with extra equipment that affects weight. The manner in which the car and other non-technical factors can ct fuel consumption. Consumption is nd power output lower for fuel with e rating of 91 RON.

Petrol Most engines can be run with octane ratings of 91, 95 and 98 RON.

91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinder engines and should only be used in ex- ceptional cases with other engines.

95 RON can be used for normal driving. 98 RON is recommended for optimum

performance and minimum fuel consump- tion.

When driving in temperatures above +38 C, it is recommended to use fuel with the high- est possible octane rating for optimum per- formance and fuel economy.

Petrol Norm EN 228

Diesel The diesel engines fuel system is sensitive to contaminants. Only use diesel from well- known oil companies, see page 179.

Diesel Norm EN 590 or JIS K2204

IMPORTANT

Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damag- ing the catalytic converter. In order for the Volvo warranty to apply, never mix alcohol with petrol, the fuel system could be damaged.

11 Specifications

253

Catalytic converter

11

Genera

The pur purify ex of exhau it quickl catalytic (ceramic nel walls num, rh act as c accelera used up

Lambd The Lam intended fuel eco

An oxyg tent of t This valu that con valves. T adjusted conditio gether w reduce h carbon

l

pose of the catalytic converter is to haust gases. It is located in the flow st gases close to the engine so that

y reaches operating temperature. The converter consists of a monolith or metal) with channels. The chan- are lined with a thin layer of plati-

odium and palladium. These metals atalysts, i.e. they participate in and te a chemical reaction without being themselves.

a-sondTM oxygen sensor bda-sond is part of a control system to reduce emissions and improve

nomy.

en sensor monitors the oxygen con- he exhaust gases leaving the engine. e is fed into an electronic system

tinuously controls the injection he ratio of air to fuel is continuously . These adjustments create optimal ns for efficient combustion, and to- ith the three-way catalytic converter armful emissions (hydrocarbons,

monoxide and nitrous oxides).

11 Specifications

254

Elect

11

Genera

12 V sys tor. Sing and eng

Battery

If the ba battery reserve on the b

Voltag

Cold st

Reserv Capaci

1 Cars eq 2 Cars eq

or RTI.

rical system

l

tem with a voltage-regulated alterna- le pole system in which the chassis ine block are used as conductors.

ttery is changed, replace it with a of the same cold start capacity and capacity as the original (see the decal attery).

e 12 V 12 V 12 V

art capacity (CCA) 590 A 600 A1 700 A2

e capacity (RC) 100 min 120 min 135 min ty (Ah) 60 70 80

uipped with High Performance audio system.

uipped with diesel, keyless drive, audio system Premium Sound, fuel-driven heater

11 Specifications

255

Electrical system

11

Bulbs

Lighti

Dipped Bi-Xen Main b Brake l Directio Rear po Courte lighting Vanity m Front p Directio Fog lam Gloveb

ng Output W Socket

beam 55 H7 on 35 D2S eam 55 HB3 ights, reversing lamps, rear fog lamp 21 BA15s n indicators, rear/front (yellow) 21 BAU15s sition/parking lamps, rear side marker lamps 5 BAY15d

sy lighting, cargo area lighting, number plate 5 SV8.5

irror 1.2 SV5.5 osition/parking lamps, front side marker lamps 5 W 2.1 x 9.5d n indicators in door mirrors (yellow) 5 W 2.1 x 9.5d ps 55 H11

ox lighting 3 BA9

Alphabetical index

258

A ABS ….

ABS AC …… Active B Active c Active c Active Y Adaptive Addition Air cond

ECC gene

Air distri ECC

Air distri Airbag

deac drive

Alarm armin autom deac disar gene indic

Alarm d All-whee Audio fu

HU-4

Boot lid automatic locking ……………………………. 99 driving with open boot lid ……………….. 110 locking/unlocking …………………………….. 96

Bottle holder for rear seat passengers ……. 89 Brake fluid, checking and topping up ……. 183 Brake system ……………………………… 123, 183 Brakes, handbrake ……………………………….. 56 Bulb holder

location of the bulbs ………………………. 193 number plate lighting ……………………… 192 removal ………………………………………… 193

Bulbs replacement ………………………………….. 188 specifications ………………………………… 255

C Car care, leather upholstery ………………… 170 Car upholstery …………………………………… 169 Car wash …………………………………………… 168 Cargo area

bag holder ………………………………………. 92 loading …………………………………………. 142 locking …………………………………………… 46

Cassette player, HU-450 …………………….. 220 Catalytic converter ……………………………… 253

recovery ……………………………………….. 130 CD changer, external ………………………….. 223 CD player, HU-650 …………………………….. 221 Checks

fluids and oils ………………………………… 180

……………………………………………….123 fault …………………………………………42 ……………………………………………72, 75 i-Xenon Lights, ABL …………………..47 hassis ………………………………………45 hassis FOUR-C ……………………..127 aw Control ……………………………..125 system …………………………………119 al heater …………………………………..79 itioning ……………………………….72, 75 ………………………………………………..74 ral ……………………………………………70 bution ………………………………………77 ………………………………………………..75 bution, A/C ……………………………….73

tivation ……………………………………..20 rs and front passenger side ……….16

g …………………………………………..104 atic alarm activation ……………….104

tivating a triggered alarm ………….104 ming ………………………………………104 ral ………………………………………….104 ator lamp ………………………………..105 etectors …………………………………….46 l drive …………………………………….122 nctions 50/650/850 …………………………….209

Audio HU-450, overview …………………….. 206 Audio HU-850, overview …………………….. 208 AUTO CLIMATE …………………………………… 74 Automatic car wash ……………………………. 168 Automatic dimming ……………………………… 61 Automatic gearbox …………………………….. 119

safety systems ……………………………… 119 towing and recovery ………………………. 130 trailer …………………………………………… 133 W-button ……………………………………… 122

Automatic locking ………………………………… 99 Auxiliary lamps ……………………………………. 46 Average fuel consumption …………………….. 52

B Backrest rear seat, tipping ……………………. 91 Battery

care …………………………………………….. 185 jump starting ………………………………… 132 overload ……………………………………….. 111 replacement …………………………………. 186 replacing the battery in the remote control …………………………………………… 98 symbols on the battery …………………… 186

Blind spot (BLIS) ………………………………… 149 BLIS ……………………………………………. 45, 149 Bonnet ……………………………………………… 178 Booster cushion

lowering …………………………………………. 32 raising ……………………………………………. 31

Booster cushion, integrated ………………….. 31

Alphabetical index

259

Child child

Child se fixtur insta

Children child child posit safet safet

Cigarett Cigarett Clean in Cleaning

autom car w leath seatb upho wate

Climate AUTO

Climate Clock ..

settin Clutch f Coat ha Collision

collis inflat

cooling system ………………………………. 112 economical …………………………………… 110 in water ………………………………………… 111 slippery driving conditions ………………. 110 with open boot lid ………………………….. 110 with trailer …………………………………….. 133

Driving in water ………………………………….. 111 DSTC, see also stabiliser system …………… 45

symbol …………………………………………… 43 DSTC, see also Stability control system … 125 DSTC, see also Stability system

deactivating/activating ……………………. 125 symbol …………………………………………… 43

E ECC, electronic climate control ……………… 70 ECO pressure

fuel economy ………………………………… 157 table …………………………………………….. 158

Economical driving …………………………….. 110 Electrical socket

centre console …………………………… 46, 47 rear seat …………………………………………. 57

Electronic immobiliser …………………………… 96 Emissions ………………………………………….. 250

carbon dioxide ………………………………. 252 Emissions system

fault indicator ………………………………….. 43 Emissions system, fault indicator …………… 42 Engine ………………………………………………. 178 Engine compartment ………………………….. 178

seats and airbags ……………………..27 at e system …………………………………..33 llation ……………………………………….33

safety locks ……………………………103 seats and side airbags ………………21 ion in car, table ………………………….29 y ……………………………………………..31 y equipment ……………………………..27 e lighter …………………………………….46 e lighter socket, rear seat ……………57 side and out ……………………………….8

atic car wash …………………………168 ash ………………………………………..168 er upholstery …………………………..169 elts ………………………………………..170 lstery ……………………………………..169 r-repellent surface ……………………169 control settings ……………………………………………..74

control, general …………………………70 …………………………………………………41 g the clock ……………………………….40

luid, checking and topping up ……183 nger …………………………………………89

ion sensors ………………………………23 able curtain ……………………………….23

Collision, see Collision …………………………. 23 Colour code, paint ……………………………… 171 Combined instrument panel ………………….. 40 Compass ……………………………………………. 61

calibration ………………………………………. 63 setting the zone ………………………………. 62

Condensation ……………………………………. 179 Coolant, checking and topping up ……….. 182 Coolant, filling ……………………………………. 182 Cooling system ………………………………….. 112 Cruise control ……………………………………… 55

D Deadlocks ……………………………………. 46, 102

temporary deactivation ………………….. 102 Defroster …………………………………………….. 73

rear window ……………………………………. 73 Defroster, door mirrors …………………………. 73 Designation of dimensions ………………….. 154 Diesel ……………………………………………….. 179 Diesel filter ………………………………………… 179 Diesel particle filter …………………………….. 115 Dipped beam ………………………………………. 49 Direction indicators ……………………………… 51 Display, messages ………………………………. 44 Door mirrors ……………………………………….. 64

defrosting ………………………………………. 64 Driveable punctured tyres …………………… 162 Drivers door control panel ……………………. 58 Driving

adverse driving conditions ……………… 180

Alphabetical index

260

Engine o adve capa chan filter oil gr oil pr

Engine s Expecta

F Fan

AC . ECC

Floor ma Fluids a

chec Fluids, c FOUR-C Front se Fuel

cons fuel c fuel e fuel f fuel s parki refue

Fuel fille Fuel gau Function

I Ignition keys ………………………………………. 116 IMEI number ……………………………………… 239 Immobiliser ………………………………….. 96, 116 «Important!» texts …………………………………… 6 Indicator lamp ……………………………………. 105 Instrument lighting ……………………………….. 49 Instrument overview

left-hand drive car ……………………………. 36 right-hand drive car …………………………. 38

Integrated booster cushion ……………………. 31 Interior lighting …………………………………….. 84 Interior rearview mirror ………………………….. 61 Intermittent wiping ……………………………….. 53 ISOFIX, fixture system ………………………….. 33

J Jack …………………………………………………. 159 Jump starting …………………………………….. 132

K Kerb weight ……………………………………….. 243 Key …………………………………………………….. 96

remote control ………………………………… 96 Kick-down, automatic gearbox ……………. 122

L Lambda-sond ……………………………………. 253 Leather upholstery, washing instructions . 170 Levelling ……………………………………………. 134

il ……………………………………………180 rse driving conditions ……………….246 cities ………………………………………247 ging ……………………………………….180 ………………………………………………180 ade ………………………………………..246 essure ……………………………………..42 pecifications …………………………..244 nt mothers, safety ……………………..13

…………………………………………………73 ………………………………………………..75 ts ……………………………………………82

nd oils ks …………………………………………..180 apacities ………………………………..249 Active chassis ……………………..127 ats, heated ……………………………….48

umption ………………………………….250 onsumption, display ………………….52 conomy …………………………………157 ilter ………………………………………..179 ystem …………………………………….179 ng heater ………………………………….79 lling ………………………………………..113 r flap, emergency opening ………..114 ge …………………………………………..40 s during a call …………………………230

Fuses box in cargo area ………………………….. 201 box in engine compartment ……………. 196 box in passenger compartment .. 198, 199 changing ………………………………………. 195 general …………………………………………. 195

G Gearbox

automatic …………………………………….. 119 manual …………………………………………. 118

Glovebox ……………………………………………. 89 locking …………………………………………. 102

Gross vehicle weight ………………………….. 243

H Handbrake ………………………………………….. 56 Hazard warning flashers ……………………….. 47 Head restraint

centre seat, rear ……………………………… 90 Head restraints

lowering …………………………………………. 46 Headlamp pattern ………………………………. 144 Headlamps ……………………………………….. 188

headlamp washers ………………………….. 54 off/on …………………………………………….. 49

Heating front seats ………………………………… 72, 75

Home safe lighting ……………………………….. 51 HU-450, overview ………………………………. 206 HU-850, overview ………………………………. 208

Alphabetical index

261

Lighting Activ autom autom bulb bulbs dippe exter head home in the lighti main posit readi rear f switc traffic

Lighting cargo court dippe direc fog la front locat main parki posit rear l side

P PACOS ……………………………………………….. 19 Paint

paintwork damage and touching up …. 171 Paintwork

colour code …………………………………… 171 Panel vents …………………………………………. 71 Parking assistance ………………………… 46, 128

sensors for parking assistance ………… 129 Parking brake …………………………………. 43, 56 Parking heater

battery and fuel ……………………………….. 79 general …………………………………………… 78 parking on a hill ………………………………. 78 time setting …………………………………….. 79

Parking lamps ……………………………………… 49 Petrol grade ………………………………………. 252 Phone system ……………………………………. 226 PI seek ……………………………………………… 215 Pinch protection, sunroof ……………………… 66 Polishing …………………………………………… 169 Position lamps …………………………………….. 49 Power seat ………………………………………….. 83 Power steering …………………………………… 117 Power steering fluid, checking and topping up …………………………………………. 183 Power windows …………………………………… 58

blocking …………………………………………. 59 passenger seat ……………………………….. 59 rear seat …………………………………………. 60

Privacy handset …………………………………. 229

e Bi-Xenon Lights ………………………47 atic lighting …………………………….84 atic lighting, dipped beam ………..49

replacement, general ……………….188 , specifications ……………………….255 d beam ……………………………………49

ior ……………………………………………49 lamp levelling ……………………………49 safe lighting …………………………….51 passenger compartment …………..84

ng panel ……………………………………49 /dipped beam ……………………………51 ion/parking lamps ……………………..49 ng lamps ………………………………….84 og lamp ……………………………………50 hing headlamp pattern right/left-hand , ABL ………………………………………47

, bulb replacement area ……………………………………..192 esy lighting ……………………………..194 d beam ………………………………….189

tion indicators ………………….190, 191 mp ………………………………………..192

………………………………………………188 ion of the bulbs in the bulb holder 193 beam …………………………………….189 ng lamps ………………………………..190 ion lamps ………………………………..190 amp ……………………………………….193 marker lamps …………………………..191

vanity mirror lighting ………………………. 194 Loading

general …………………………………………. 142 load capacity ………………………………… 142

Locking ………………………………………………. 99 from inside ……………………………………. 100 from outside …………………………………… 99 unlocking ……………………………………….. 99

Lock-up function ……………………………….. 119 Lubricants, capacities ………………………… 249

M Main beam ………………………………………….. 51

off/on …………………………………………….. 49 switching and flashing ……………………… 51

Main beam «flash» ……………………………….. 51 Maintenance, rustproofing ………………….. 172 Manual gearbox …………………………………. 118 Misting

attending to the windows …………………. 70 rear window ……………………………………. 73 removing with defroster function …. 73, 75 timer function, ECC …………………………. 76

N «Note» texts ………………………………………….. 6

O Oil pressure, see also Engine oil ……………. 42 Outside temperature gauge ………………….. 40 Oxyhydrogen gas ………………………………. 132

Alphabetical index

262

R Radio fu

gene HU-4 HU-6

Rain sen Reading Rear win Rearview

defro door interi

Recircul A/C ECC

Recover Refriger Refuellin

fuel c refue

Relay/fu in ca in en in pa

Remote funct repla

Remote Remote

Spin control ……………………………………….. 125 SRS system

general …………………………………………… 17 switch ……………………………………………. 20

SST Self Supporting run flat Tyres ……… 162 Stability control system ………………………. 125 Stains ……………………………………………….. 169 Standby mode, phone ………………………… 228 Starting from cold, automatic gearbox ….. 119 Starting the engine ……………………………… 115 STC ………………………………………………….. 125 Steering lock ……………………………………… 117 Steering wheel

cruise control ………………………………….. 55 keypad left-hand side ………………………. 55 steering wheel adjustment ………………… 56

Stone chips and scratches ………………….. 171 Storage compartment …………………………… 86 Storage spaces in the passenger compartment …………………………………. 86, 87 Storing radio stations ………………………….. 213 Sunroof ………………………………………………. 65

pinch protection ………………………………. 66 sunscreen ………………………………………. 66

Sunscreen, sunroof ………………………………. 66 Symbols ……………………………………………. 126

warning symbols ……………………………… 41

T Tachometer …………………………………………. 40 Tank volume ……………………………………… 250

nctions ral ………………………………………….212 50 ………………………………………….213 50/850 …………………………………..214 sor ………………………………………….53 lamps ……………………………………..84 dow, defrosting ………………………..48 mirrors …………………………………..61

sting ………………………………………..48 …………………………………………..46, 64 or …………………………………………….61 ation …………………………………………………73 ………………………………………………..76 y ……………………………………………130 ant …………………………………………..70 g ap …………………………………………113 lling ………………………………………..113 se box rgo area ………………………………….201 gine compartment ……………………196 ssenger compartment ……….198, 199 control …………………………………….96 ions …………………………………………96 cing the battery …………………………98 control functions ……………………….97 control system, type approved ….256

Reverse gear inhibitor five-speed …………………………………….. 118

Rustproofing ……………………………………… 172

S Safety ………………………………………………… 12

safety systems, table ……………………….. 26 Seat

power seat ……………………………………… 83 Seatbelt ……………………………………………… 12

pregnancy ……………………………………… 13 seatbelt tensioner ……………………………. 14

Seatbelt reminder ………………………………… 13 Seatbelt tensioner ……………………………….. 14 Seats

manual setting ………………………………… 82 Service locking ………………………………….. 101 Service programme ……………………………. 176 Side airbags ………………………………………… 21 SIM card …………………………………………… 228 SIM cards, double ……………………………… 239 SIPS bags …………………………………………… 21 Soot filter …………………………………….. 44, 115 SOOT FILTER FULL …………………………… 115 Spare wheel ………………………………………. 159

Temporary spare …………………………… 160 Speed classes, tyres ………………………….. 154 Speed dial ………………………………………… 230 Speed related power steering ……………… 117 Speedometer ………………………………………. 40 Spin Control ……………………………………… 125

Alphabetical index

263

Tempera actua pass clima pass contr

Tools .. Towbar, Towing Towing

gene insta remo spec

Towing TPMS System Traction Traction Trailer

cable drivin traile

Trip com Trip met Tuning, Type ap Type de Tyre

press

Washers for headlamps …………………………………. 54 for windscreen ………………………………… 54

Washing the car …………………………………. 168 Waxing ……………………………………………… 169 Wheels

fitting ……………………………………………. 164 removing ………………………………………. 163

Whiplash injury WHIPS …………………………. 24 WHIPS ……………………………………………….. 24

child seat/booster cushion ……………….. 24 Windscreen wipers

rain sensor ……………………………………… 53 washers …………………………………………. 54

Windscreen wipers and washers ……………. 53 Winter driving …………………………………….. 115 Winter tyres ……………………………………….. 155 Wiper blades

replacing headlamps ……………………… 184 replacing, windscreen …………………….. 184

ture l temperature ……………………………70

enger compartment, electronic te control …………………………………74 enger compartment, manual climate ol …………………………………………….72 ……………………………………………….159 see Towing equipment …………….135 ………………………………………………130 equipment ral ………………………………………….135 llation ……………………………………..137 ving ……………………………………….140 ifications …………………………………136 eye …………………………………………130 Tyre Pressure Monitoring ………………………………………………161 control …………………………………..125 control system ……………………….125

…………………………………………….135 g with a trailer …………………………133 r weight ………………………………….243 puter ……………………………………….52 er …………………………………………….40 radio ………………………………………212 proved, remote control system ….256 signation …………………………………242

ure ………………………………………..157

Tyres designation of dimensions ……………… 154 direction of rotation ……………………….. 156 driving characteristics ……………………. 154 ECO pressure ……………………………….. 158 general …………………………………………. 154 speed classes ……………………………….. 154 summer and winter wheels …………….. 156 tread wear indicators ……………………… 155 tyre pressure monitoring ………………… 161 winter tyres …………………………………… 155

U Unlocking

boot lid ………………………………………….. 99 from inside ……………………………………. 100 from outside …………………………………… 99 keyless …………………………………………… 99

V Vehicle data ………………………………………. 176 Ventilation …………………………………………… 71 Volume, phone ………………………………….. 231

W Warning lamp

Stability and traction control system … 125 Warning symbol, AIRBAG system ………….. 15 «Warning!» texts ……………………………………. 6 Warning triangle ………………………………… 159 Washer fluid, topping up …………………….. 182

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:

А вот и еще интересные новости по теме:

  • Электрический духовой шкаф bosch serie 4 hbf514bs0r инструкция
  • Мануал для kawasaki gpz 400
  • Должностная инструкция мастера прр на предприятии
  • Клиника пирогова руководство
  • Диамакс инструкция по применению в ветеринарии

  • 0 0 голоса
    Рейтинг статьи
    Подписаться
    Уведомить о
    guest

    0 комментариев
    Старые
    Новые Популярные
    Межтекстовые Отзывы
    Посмотреть все комментарии